all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photo |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.17 MiB | February 03 2016 | |||
various |
|
Users Manual Rev N | Users Manual | 1.87 MiB | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 498.59 KiB | March 02 2023 / August 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
various |
|
Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 133.48 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
Covered List Attestation | Attestation Statements | 173.20 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
SAR Report (1) | RF Exposure Info | 1.09 MiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
SAR Report (2) Test Set- Up Photos | Test Setup Photos | 467.25 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
SAR Report (3) | RF Exposure Info | 4.55 MiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
US Agent Attestation | Attestation Statements | 152.99 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 | |||
various |
|
Agent Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 113.52 KiB | March 02 2023 | |||
various | BOM | Parts List/Tune Up Info | March 02 2023 | confidential | ||||
various | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | March 02 2023 | confidential | ||||
various |
|
Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 184.96 KiB | March 02 2023 | |||
various |
|
EMC Test Report | Test Report | 458.52 KiB | March 02 2023 | |||
various |
|
EMC Test Set- up Photos | Test Setup Photos | 341.85 KiB | March 02 2023 | |||
various |
|
Extended Frequency Range Attestation | Attestation Statements | 191.54 KiB | March 02 2023 | |||
various | Schematics (1) | Schematics | March 02 2023 | confidential | ||||
various | schematics (2) | Schematics | March 02 2023 | confidential | ||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | Test Report | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | Comments and Response | Operational Description | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | EMC Test Photos | Test Setup Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | External Photos | External Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | Internal Photos -L Rev 0.1 | Internal Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Internal Photos -NA Models R0.3 | Internal Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Operational Description R0.1 | Operational Description | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | SAR External Photos R1.1 Part 3 of 6 | External Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | SAR KDB | Operational Description | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various | SAR Test Photos R1.1 Part 2 of 6 | Test Setup Photos | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Schematics 14035-2590 | Schematics | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various | Schematics 14035-2591 | Schematics | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various |
|
Confidentiality Letter Rev 0.2 | Cover Letter(s) | 166.43 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 | |||
various |
|
EMC Co-located Test Results Rev 0.1 | Test Report | 318.84 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 | |||
various | External Photos Rev 0.0 | External Photos | August 30 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various |
|
FCC Label | ID Label/Location Info | 498.60 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 | |||
various | Internal Photos -L Models R0.1 | Internal Photos | August 30 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Internal Photos -NA Models R0.2 | Internal Photos | August 30 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Operational Description Rev 0.1 | Operational Description | August 30 2019 | confidential | ||||
various |
|
PC Letter Rev 0.1 | Cover Letter(s) | 90.41 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 | |||
various |
|
Restricted Freq Channel Attestation R0.1 | Cover Letter(s) | 80.64 KiB | September 06 2019 | |||
various | Test Report | September 06 2019 | ||||||
various | Parts List | Parts List/Tune Up Info | September 06 2019 | confidential | ||||
various | Internal Photos -NA Rev 0.2 | Internal Photos | August 31 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release | ||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | January 23 2019 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | January 23 2019 | ||||||
various | Test Report | January 23 2019 | ||||||
various | Attestation Statements | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | February 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | February 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | February 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Report | February 03 2016 / March 03 2016 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | February 03 2016 |
various | Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.17 MiB | February 03 2016 |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc. 360 Herndon Parkway Suite 1400 Herndon, VA 20170 http://www.rheintech.com Appendix P: Manual Client: Harris Corporation Model: XL-200P (International) Portable Radio IDs: - OWDTR-0145-E/3636B-0145 Standards: FCC 22/74/80/90/IC RSS-119 Report #: 2015216TNF Please refer to the following pages for the Operators Manual and the Product Safety Manual. 477 of 487 Operators Manual 14221-1800-2000 Rev. D, Feb/16 XL-200P Full-Spectrum Multiband Radio 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D MANUAL REVISION HISTORY REV.
-
A B C D DATE Sep/15 Sep/15 Nov/15 Jan/16 Feb/16 REASON FOR CHANGE Initial release. Added Section 3. Added CE information. Updated Declaration of Conformity. Added EU regulatory approval information (standards) and EU RF exposure information. Updated Table 1-1 and Tableau 2-1. Updated for XLP R2A and added LTE info. Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:
Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 or e-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This product was developed using GEOTRANS, a product of the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency and U.S. Army Engineering Research and Development Center. Use of this software does not indicate endorsement or approval of the product by the Secretary of Defense or the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency. This device made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 5,185,796; 5,271,017;
5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,697; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. The Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 (AMBE+2) voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974, #5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579, #5,226,084 and #5,195,166. CREDITS Harris, assuredcommunications, Unity, VIDA, EDACS, NetworkFirst, and OpenSky are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE!
The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99; in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PSPC Business, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations or substitutions of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer's warranty. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. This manual is published by Harris Corporation without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2016 Harris Corporation. 2 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D This device is a RF transceiver intended for land mobile radio applications. The device may have use restrictions, which require that the national authority be contacted for any system licensing requirements, frequency use, allowable power level, etc. 3 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D esky
[Czech]
Dansk
[Danish]
Deutsch
[German]
Harris Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento XL-200P je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede Harris Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr XL-200P overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Harris Corporation, dass sich das Gert XL-200P in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Eesti
[Estonian]
Kesolevaga kinnitab Harris Corporation seadme XL-200P vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. English Hereby, Harris Corporation, declares that this XL-200P is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Espaol
[Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais
[French]
Italiano
[Italian]
Por medio de la presente Harris Corporation declara que el XL-200P cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Harris Corporation XL-200P 1999/5/. Par la prsente Harris Corporation dclare que l'appareil XL-200P est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Harris Corporation dichiara che questo XL-200P conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latviski
[Latvian]
Ar o Harris Corporation deklar, XG 25P UHF-L(378-470 MHz), 7/800 (764-870MHz) atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
iuo Harris Corporation deklaruoja, kad is XL-200P atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Nederlands
[Dutch]
Malti
[Maltese]
Hierbij verklaart Harris Corporation dat het toestel XL-200P in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Hawnhekk, Harris Corporation, jiddikjara li dan XL-200P jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Magyar
[Hungarian]
Alulrott, Harris Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a XL-200P megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. 4 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Polski
[Polish]
Niniejszym Harris Corporation owiadcza, e XL-200P jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portugus
[Portuguese]
Harris Corporation declara que este XL-200P est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Harris Corporation izjavlja, da je ta XL-200P v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Slovensky
[Slovak]
Harris Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e XL-200P spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Suomi
[Finnish]
Svenska
[Swedish]
Harris Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett XL-200P tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar Harris Corporation att denna XL-200P str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. slenska
[Icelandic]
Hr me lsir Harris Corporation yfir v a XL-200P er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Norsk
[Norwegian]
Harris Corporation erklrer herved at utstyret XL-200P er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. 5 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.3 1.3 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 Section Page 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION ........................................................................... 10 SAFETY CONVENTIONS ........................................................................................................ 10 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION .................................................................................... 10 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines ................................................................................................ 11 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility .................................................................. 12 REGULATORY APPROVALS ................................................................................................. 12 1.3.1 Part 15 ............................................................................................................................ 12 1.3.2 Industry Canada ............................................................................................................. 12 1.4 OPERATING TIPS .................................................................................................................... 12 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation .............................................................................................. 12 1.4.2 Antenna Care and Replacement ..................................................................................... 13 1.4.3 Electronic Devices ......................................................................................................... 13 1.4.4 Aircraft ........................................................................................................................... 13 1.4.5 Electric Blasting Caps .................................................................................................... 13 1.4.6 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres ............................................................................... 13 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT ....................................... 14 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT ...................................................... 14 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT ...................................... 14 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF ................................................................................ 15 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique .............................................................. 16 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ....................................................................... 16 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC ........................................................................................................ 16 2.3.2 Industrie Canada ............................................................................................................ 16 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ................................................................................................... 16 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio ..................................................................................... 16 3. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS .............................................................................................................. 19 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 21 4. 4.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 21 4.2 STORAGE GUIDELINES ......................................................................................................... 21 BASIC SETUP ........................................................................................................................... 22 4.3 4.3.1 Assemble the Radio ....................................................................................................... 22 4.3.2 Removing the Battery .................................................................................................... 23 4.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip .................................................................................. 23 4.4 UNIVERSAL DEVICE CONNECTOR ..................................................................................... 24 4.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................ 24 4.6 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................. 26 5. BASIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 28 5.1 XL-200P CONTROLS ............................................................................................................... 28 SOFT DTMF KEYPAD ............................................................................................................. 30 5.2 BEFORE FIRST USE ................................................................................................................. 30 5.3 5.4 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME ............................................................................................ 31 RADIO DISPLAYS .................................................................................................................... 31 5.5 5.5.1 Top Display ................................................................................................................... 31 5.5.2 Front Display ................................................................................................................. 31 5.6 STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................................................... 33 5.7 MENU......................................................................................................................................... 33 5.8 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS ............................................................................................ 36 2.4 6 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.14 5.9 ALERT TONES.......................................................................................................................... 37 5.10 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 38 5.11 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK ............................................................................. 39 5.12 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD....................................................................................................... 39 5.13 GROUP CALLS ......................................................................................................................... 40 5.13.1 Transmit a Group Call ................................................................................................... 40 5.13.2 Receive a Group Call ..................................................................................................... 40 INDIVIDUAL CALLS ............................................................................................................... 41 5.14.1 Transmit an Individual Call ........................................................................................... 41 5.14.2 Receiving an Individual Call ......................................................................................... 41 5.15 PROFILES .................................................................................................................................. 42 5.16 NOISE CANCELLATION ......................................................................................................... 42 5.16.1 Enable Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................. 43 5.16.2 Using Noise Cancellation .............................................................................................. 43 5.16.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone ................................................................ 43 5.16.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone ......................................................................... 44 5.16.5 When using an SCBA Mask .......................................................................................... 44 5.17 PTT OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 44 5.18 VOICE ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................................ 44 5.19 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................ 45 5.20 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE ............................................................................................. 45 5.21 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................. 46 5.22 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................................................................................................................ 47 5.23 TYPE 99 OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 48 5.23.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 ................................................................................................. 48 5.23.2 Disable After PTT.......................................................................................................... 48 5.23.3 Auto Reset ..................................................................................................................... 48 5.24 CALL ALERT (PAGE) .............................................................................................................. 49 5.24.1 Send Alert ...................................................................................................................... 49 5.24.2 Receive Alert ................................................................................................................. 49 5.25 DTMF ......................................................................................................................................... 49 5.26 AUDIO PLAYBACK ................................................................................................................. 49 5.27 START SCAN ............................................................................................................................ 50 5.28 STOP SCAN ............................................................................................................................... 51 5.29 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................ 52 5.30 NUISANCE DELETE ................................................................................................................ 53 5.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION .................................................................................................... 54 5.31.1 Declaring an Emergency Call ........................................................................................ 54 5.31.2 Receiving an Emergency Call ....................................................................................... 54 5.31.3 Stealth Emergency ......................................................................................................... 54 5.32 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................................. 55 5.32.1 Normal PTT Operation .................................................................................................. 55 5.32.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling ................................................................................... 55 5.32.3 Emergency Declaration ................................................................................................. 55 6. ADVANCED OPERATIONS .............................................................................................................. 56 6.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES ......................................................................................... 56 6.1.1 View Personalities ......................................................................................................... 56 6.1.2 Change Active Personality ............................................................................................ 56 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY ................................. 57 6.2 7 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 58 6.3.1 Command Tactical Zone ................................................................................................ 58 6.3.2 Mixed System Zone ....................................................................................................... 59 6.4 CH INFO MENU ........................................................................................................................ 60 6.5 AUDIO SETTINGS .................................................................................................................... 60 6.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 61 6.7 GPS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 62 6.8 POSITION INFO ........................................................................................................................ 62 6.9 WI-FI .......................................................................................................................................... 63 6.10 BLUETOOTH ............................................................................................................................ 64 6.10.1 Enable Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 64 6.10.2 Pair Devices ................................................................................................................... 64 6.11 CLOCK SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 65 6.12 BATTERY SETTINGS .............................................................................................................. 66 6.13 SELECT LANGUAGE............................................................................................................... 66 6.14 SET UP SCAN ........................................................................................................................... 67 6.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels .................................................................. 67 6.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning ................................................................................... 67 6.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) .......................................................... 68 6.14.4 Edit Scan List ................................................................................................................. 68 6.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels ......................................................... 69 6.14.6 Custom Scan Lists ......................................................................................................... 69 6.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) ............................................................... 71 6.15 RADIO STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 71 6.16 RADIO MESSAGE .................................................................................................................... 72 6.17 RADIO TEXTLINK ................................................................................................................... 72 6.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages ............................................................................................. 72 6.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms ................................................................................................... 73 6.17.3 View Received Messages .............................................................................................. 73 6.18 FAULTS/ALERTS ..................................................................................................................... 74 6.19 TONE ENCODE ........................................................................................................................ 75 6.20 ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................................................... 75 6.20.1 Create and Load Keys .................................................................................................... 75 6.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio ............................................................................................... 76 6.20.3 Protected Keys ............................................................................................................... 76 6.20.4 Global Encryption .......................................................................................................... 76 6.20.5 Select Keyset ................................................................................................................. 77 6.20.6 View Key List ................................................................................................................ 77 6.20.7 OTAR Configuration ..................................................................................................... 78 7. PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................................ 79 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 .................................................................................................. 79 7.1 7.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ..................................... 79 7.3 OTAP .......................................................................................................................................... 81 7.4 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES ................................................................. 81 7.4.1 Programmable Buttons .................................................................................................. 81 7.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch.................................................................................. 82 7.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch .................................................................................... 83 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS ...................................................................................................... 84 7.5.1 Top display .................................................................................................................... 84 7.5.2 Front display .................................................................................................................. 85 7.5 8 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 8. REFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................ 86 8.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES ........................................................................................................ 86 8.2 NARROWBANDING ................................................................................................................ 91 9. GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................................... 92 10. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 95 10.1 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 95 10.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 96 11. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................. 97 12. WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................ 97 APPENDIX A WI-FI PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................... 98 LIST OF FIGURES Page Figure 4-1: Radio Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 22 Figure 4-2: Remove the Battery ..................................................................................................................... 23 Figure 4-3: Remove Belt Clip ........................................................................................................................ 23 Figure 4-4: Universal Device Connector ....................................................................................................... 24 Figure 5-1: XL-200P Controls ....................................................................................................................... 28 Figure 5-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad .................................................................................................... 30 Figure 5-3: Top Display ................................................................................................................................. 31 Figure 5-4: Sample Idle Front Display .......................................................................................................... 31 Figure 5-5: Using Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................................ 43 Figure 6-1: Enabling Wi-Fi ............................................................................................................................ 63 Figure 6-2: Wi-Fi Install Active ..................................................................................................................... 63 Figure 12-1: Enable WIFI in RPM 2 ............................................................................................................. 98 Figure 12-2: Enable Wi-Fi on XL-200P ........................................................................................................ 99 Figure 12-3: RPM2 Network Configuration Screen .................................................................................... 100 LIST OF TABLES Page Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances ............................................................................... 11 Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF ......................................................... 15 Table 4-1: Options and Accessories ............................................................................................................... 26 Table 5-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors ............................................................................ 28 Table 5-2: Radio Icons ................................................................................................................................... 32 Table 5-3: Status Messages ............................................................................................................................ 33 Table 5-4: Menu Navigation ......................................................................................................................... 33 Table 5-5: Predefined Menu Layouts ............................................................................................................. 36 Table 5-6: Alert Tones ................................................................................................................................... 37 Table 7-1: Valid Frequencies ......................................................................................................................... 81 Table 7-2: Programmable Button Options ..................................................................................................... 81 Table 7-3: Programmable /O Switch Options ............................................................................................. 82 Table 7-4: Single-Instance Features ............................................................................................................... 83 Table 7-5: Indexed Features ........................................................................................................................... 84 Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies ...................................................................................................................... 86 Table 10-1: Displayed Error Messages, Reasons, and Resolutions .............................................................. 95 9 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used throughout this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these standards. The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in damage to the equipment or severely degrade the equipment performance. The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. WARNING CAUTION NOTE 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed for and classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is NOT intended for use by the General Population in an uncontrolled environment. WARNING The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this Harris radio complies with the following Standards and Guidelines with regard to RF energy and electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:
FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102. Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus
(All Frequency Bands). European Council Directive 89/391/EEC. 10 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines To ensure that exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the EU/AU/FCC/IC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:
CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. (Refer to Table 4-1.) DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button. ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 in (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure EU/AU/FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 2 in (5 cm) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Refer to Standard EN 62311:2008. Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Testing Distances1 RADIO FREQUENCY VHF
(136 - 174 MHz) UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz TESTED DISTANCES
(worst case scenario) Body2 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) Face 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm)
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) 1 Minimum safe operating distances for the radio are based on the Harmonized Standards and SAR evaluation. 2 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 11 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D The information in this section provides the information needed to make the user aware of RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits. 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility During transmissions, this Harris radio generates RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radio in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS 1.3.1 Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 OPERATING TIPS Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low-lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle, or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring that the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the battery. 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on!
WARNING 12 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 1.4.2 Antenna Care and Replacement Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin. Replace a damaged antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, and may violate FCC regulations. Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. (Refer to Table 4-1.) WARNING CAUTION 1.4.3 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc. is shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!
CAUTION 1.4.4 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!
Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!
WARNING 1.4.5 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the "Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard:
1926.900) WARNING 1.4.6 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn off two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that a radio or its accessories could generate sparks. WARNING 13 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner une blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les conditions identifies soient compltement comprises ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une importante baisse de rendement de lquipement. Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires qui peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT REMARQUE 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT La radio portative Harris XL-200P produit de lnergie lectromagntique des RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi par des individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une utilisation par la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :
Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences. American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de lIEEE sur les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure des champs lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. 14 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de la FCC pour lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. (Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT
(bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de la pile, une faible puissance rduit lexposition aux RF. Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-
parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.
(Reportez-vous Table 4-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs de votre transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES VHF
(136 - 174 MHz) UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz DISTANCES TESTES
(pire des scnarios) Corps3 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) 3 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 1,2 cm Visage 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 15 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires pour sensibiliser lutilisateur lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est indiqu de le faire. Nutilisez PAS le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 Partie 15 de la FCC INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :
1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne fixe lextrieur peut faciliter le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!
MISE EN GARDE 16 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 2.4.1.1 Entretien Et Remplacement De Lantenne Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez immdiatement une antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio portative alors que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la radio et pourrait enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes non autorises, des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. (Reportez-vous Table 4-1.) MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lquipement lectronique moderne dans les voitures, les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-le!
AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion!
Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!
MISE EN GARDE 2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques Pour prvenir la dtonation accidentelle des dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de 305 m (1 000 pi) des oprations de dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. (Norme OSHA : 1926.900) MISE EN GARDE 17 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies clairement comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation en carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les zones dont lair contient des produits chimiques ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez les radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio ou ses accessoires produisent des tincelles. MISE EN GARDE 18 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 3. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
(APPLIED FOR CERTIFICATION) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D or non-hazardous
(unclassified) locations only. Cet quipement convient pour usage en Classe I, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C et D, ou en sites non-
hasardeux (non-classifis) seulement EXPLOSION HAZARD REPLACE BATTERY PACK ONLY IN AN AREA KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS, AND ONLY WITH HARRIS PART NO. 14035-4010-01. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION LES BATTERIES DOIVENT TRE REMPLACES DANS UNE ZONE RECONNUE NON-HASARDEUSE SEULEMENT, ET SEULEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE HARRIS PORTANT LE NUMRO DE PICE 14035-4010-01. EXPLOSION HAZARD Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION Une substitution de toute composante pourrait compromettre la convenance pour la Classe I, Division 2. EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not exceed maximum battery charging current of 5.250 A or maximum charging voltage of 12.0 V DC at any time. WARNING WARNING WARNING CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or explosion when heated above 100C (212F) or incinerated. Replace battery with Harris Part No. 14035-4010-01 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. WARNING Battery replacement instructions: Remove battery by 1) depressing battery latches then 2) remove battery from radio chassis. Install replacement battery by inserting battery in radio chassis opening and depressing battery into chassis until both battery latches are engaged. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. EXPLOSION HAZARD In addition to any simple single-ended coil antenna, only the following Harris accessories may be used with this radio:
WARNING PART NUMBER 12082-0600-01 12082-0600-02 12082-0650-01 12082-0650-02 12082-0650-03 12082-0650-04 12082-0650-05 12082-0650-06 DESCRIPTION SPEAKER MICROPHONE Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button Microphone,Palm,2 Wire, Black Microphone,Palm,2 Wire, Beige Microphone,Mini-Lapel,3 Wire, Black Microphone,Mini-Lapel,3 Wire, Beige EARPHONE KIT,BLACK,XG-100P EARPHONE KIT,BEIGE,XG-100P 19 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D PART NUMBER 12082-0650-07 12082-0650-08 12082-0650-09 12082-0650-10 12082-0650-13 12082-0650-14 12082-0650-15 12082-0650-16 12082-0650-17 12082-0650-18 12082-0650-19 LS103239V1 LS103239V2 12150-1000-01 DESCRIPTION Headset, In-Ear, Boom Mic, In-Line PTT Headset, Lightweight, Over-the-Head, Single Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Lightweight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Lightweight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, Pigtail PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Behind-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Over-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, Behind-the-Head, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Headset, Tactical, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Skull Mic, w/Body PTT and Earcup Throat Mic, W/Acoustic Tube & Body PTT Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, Body and Ring PTT Earphone, Lapel Microphone, 2.5mm Earphone, Lapel Microphone, 2.5mm, RT Angle Speaker Mic, Premium, Fire (FSM), Noise Cancelling 20 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D INTRODUCTION 4. 4.1 DESCRIPTION The XL-200P provides the advanced connectivity that first responders require while addressing evolving voice and data communications. It supports VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz, allowing voice and data communications across agencies using multiple frequencies and systems. The XL-200P delivers easy-to-
use tools in an extremely rugged radio that operates under the most adverse conditions. The XL-200P meets MIL-STD-810G for durability and is certified to more stringent MIL-STD parameters for contamination by fluids and explosive atmospheres. The XL-200P is available in both Full and Partial keypad models in black and high-visibility yellow. Standard features found on the XL-200P include:
Extremely Rugged exceeds the standards of other radios on the market. Multiband Operation supports any combination of VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz frequencies. Also allows different bands to be enabled for selected users. Single-key DES Encryption provides basic secure communications without having to buy the complete encryption option. Instant Recall of Received Audio allows user to replay the last transmission received to avoid unnecessary repetition. Active Noise Cancellation with three internal microphones to transmit intelligible audio from users in loud environments. Integrated Bluetooth for wireless interface to selected accessories. Built-in GPS for location reporting and rapid response for emergencies. Wi-Fi Connectivity permits simple and easy radio software and personality updates. Covert Mode allows users to quickly configure the radio for operation in a covert environment. Fully Programmable Keypad each key can be programmed to a variety of functions. 4 position switch provides added configuration flexibility. Unique User Interface tools specially designed by first responders make radio operation simple and intuitive. An easy-to-read multi-color front display and a monochromatic top display with optional colored backlighting enhance communications for improved user safety. For optional accessories, refer to Table 4-1. Additional accessories may have been added since publication of this manual; contact Harris for more information. 4.2 STORAGE GUIDELINES Store your XL-200P and batteries in a clean, cool (not exceeding 86 F [+30 C]), dry, and ventilated storage area. 21 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4.3 BASIC SETUP 4.3.1 Assemble the Radio Only use a Harris charger approved for the battery chemistry. Injury could occur from improper charger use. WARNING CAUTION Do not over-tighten the antenna as damage could result. 1. Make sure batteries are charged per the manual supplied with the charger. 2. To attach optional belt clip, remove the existing tab from the back of the radio above the battery compartment. Slide the belt clip into the groove. 3. Lift clip, if installed, and slide top of battery into top of battery compartment at the rear of the radio. 4. Press down on bottom side of battery until it snaps into place. Figure 4-1: Radio Assembly 22 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4.3.2 Removing the Battery To remove, press and hold the two tabs at the bottom of the battery and then pull battery up and out of the radio. Figure 4-2: Remove the Battery 4.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip Remove the battery before removing the belt clip. To remove the belt clip, press and hold the tab towards the top of the battery compartment and slide the belt clip out of the groove in the back of the radio. Figure 4-3: Remove Belt Clip 23 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4.4 UNIVERSAL DEVICE CONNECTOR The Universal Device Connector (UDC) provides connections for external accessories such as a headset, a speaker-microphone, audio test box, audio test cables, and programming cables. The UDC is located on the right side of the radio, opposite the PTT Button. The UDC facilitates programming and testing the radio. The UDC pins perform different functions depending on the accessory attached to the UDC. Figure 4-4: Universal Device Connector 4.5 CLEANING Keep the exterior of the radio, battery, antenna, and radio accessories clean. Periodically clean using the following procedures:
1. To remove dust and dirt, clean using damp clean cloth (warm water and mild detergent soap). 2. Follow by wiping with damp (warm water) clean cloth. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 3. Remove the battery and wipe the battery and radio contacts using a soft dry cloth to remove dirt or grease. This will ensure efficient power transfer from the battery to the radio. 4. Remove any accessories and clean the UDC contacts using a clean dry cloth. When the UDC is not in use, cover the connector with the protective dust cap to prevent the build-up of dust or water particles. 5. If the radio is used in a harsh environment (such as driving rain, salt fog, etc.), it may be necessary to periodically dry and clean the battery and radio contacts with a soft dry cloth or soft-bristle non-
metallic brush. 24 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D For more rigorous cleaning, use the following procedure:
Do not use chemical cleaners, spray, or petroleum-based products. They may damage the radio housing. We recommend using Chemtronics Electro-Wash PR (ES-1603) or equivalent. CAUTION 1. Apply the cleaning solution to a clean damp cloth and clean the radio. Do not spray cleaning solution directly on radio. To clean the radio in the speaker and microphone areas, carefully wipe these areas but prevent the cleaning solution from entering the speaker or microphone openings. NOTE 2. Wipe off the radio with clean damp cloth using mild warm soapy water. 3. Follow up by wiping off the radio with clean damp cloth using warm water only. 4. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 25 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4.6 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Only use Harris approved accessories. Refer to Harris Product and Services catalog for the complete list of options and accessories available. Contact Harris for requirements not contained in this list:
Always use the correct options and accessories (battery, antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. Immersion rated options must be used with an immersion rated radio. Refer to Table 4-1. CAUTION Table 4-1: Options and Accessories DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER ANTENNAS Antenna, Full Spectrum Antenna, Whip Wideband 378-520 MHz, 762-870 MHz Antenna, Whip, 1/4 Wave, 762-870 MHz, Antenna, Whip, 1/2 Wave, 762-870 MHz BATTERIES/CHARGERS AUDIO ACCESSORIES Battery, Lithium, Standard Capacity Charger, Single Bay Charger, Multi Bay Charger, Vehicular Speaker Microphone Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button Speaker Microphone, Wireless, Bluetooth Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling, High Visibility Yellow Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Black Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Beige Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Black Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Beige Earphone Kit, Black Earphone Kit, Beige Headset, In-Ear, Boom Mic, In-Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Over-the-Head, Single Ear, In-
Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, In-
Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual In-Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual In-Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Behind-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Over-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, BTH Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Headset, Tactical, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Skull Mic, w/Body PTT, Earcup Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, Body PTT Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, body and Ring PTT Bluetooth, Covert, Earpiece/MIC/PTT, Radios 14035-4000-01 14035-4420-01 14035-4440-02 14035-4440-01 14035-4010-01 14035-1800-01 14035-1800-02 14035-4100-01 12082-0600-01 12082-0600-02 12082-0681-01 12150-1000-01 12150-1000-05 12082-0650-01 12082-0650-02 12082-0650-03 12082-0650-04 12082-0650-05 12082-0650-06 12082-0650-07 12082-0650-08 12082-0650-09 12082-0650-10 12082-0650-11 12082-0650-12 12082-0650-13 12082-0650-14 12082-0650-15 12082-0650-16 12082-0650-17 12082-0650-18 12082-0650-19 12082-0684-01 12082-0445-A1 12082-0435-A1 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Cable, Data Interface Cable, MATQ-03424, Test 26 OPTION NUMBER XL-NC5Z XL-NC8E XL-NC8F XL-NC8D XL-PA3V XL-CH4X XL-CH5A XL-CH4W XL-AE9N XL-AE4B XL-AE6K XL-AE1T XL-AE6G XL-AE6M XL-AE6H XL-AE6N XL-AE2A XL-AE2B XL-AE2C XL-AE2D XL-AE2E XL-AE2F XL-AE1P XL-AE1R XL-AE2G XL-AE1H XL-AE1L XL-AE1M XL-AE1N XL-AE1S XL-CJ4A 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D DESCRIPTION Cable, USB, Key Loading/Programming Cable, KVL, Key Loading Adapter, 6-Pin Hirose Holster, Leather, Radio, Premium Belt Loop, Leather, Premium D-Swivel Strap, Shoulder Metal Belt Clip Case, Leather, Premium, Shoulder Strap PART NUMBER 12082-0410-A1 12082-0400-A1 14002-0197-01 14035-4201-01 14002-0218-01 12082-3230-01 CC103333V1 12082-1290-01 14035-4201-02 OPTION NUMBER XL-CJ3A XL-CJ3B XL-CJ4B XL-HC4K XL-HC4A XL-HC3L XL-HC4L 27 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5. BASIC OPERATION 5.1 XL-200P CONTROLS Figure 5-1: XL-200P Controls Table 5-1 describes the default functions of buttons, knobs, and controls. Most can be programmed for different functions; see Section 7.4 for more information. NOTE Table 5-1: XL-200P Controls, Indicators, and Connectors CONTROL/INDICATOR Group/Channel Knob Power/Volume Knob A/B (/O) Switch FUNCTION Selects groups/channels. Turn clockwise to power on radio and increase volume of audio heard from speaker. Minimum volume levels may be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. User-programmable switch (see Section 7.4.2). 28 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Microphone
(Secondary) A/B/C/D Switch User-Programmable Buttons Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button Battery Antenna Connector Emergency Button Indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) Top Display Speaker Microphones (Primary) Front Display User-Programmable Soft Keys Menu/Select Button When noise cancellation is enabled, the secondary and primary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphone is used. See Section 5.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. User-programmable switch (see Section 7.4.3). By default, selects one of four channel banks (see Section 5.17). Used to select a commonly used function as an alternative to navigating menus. This is configured via programming using Radio Personality Manager 2 (RPM2). See Section 7.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. Press to transmit. Make sure Push-To-Talk (PTT) is enabled (Section 6.5). Battery - Refer to Section 4.3 for battery connection and removal. Antenna connector. Used to place radio in emergency mode (see Section 5.31). This button can be disabled via programming using RPM2. In addition, this button can be used in conjunction with a User Programmable Button to Clear Emergencies if configured to do so. Indicates radio status:
Red = actively transmitting. Green = actively receiving. Orange = actively transmitting encrypted. Shows summary of radio operation, including channel/talkgroup (which can be color coded), as well as a variety of programmable icons. Display orientation can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio. (Section 6.6). Radio speaker which can be muted (Section 6.5). Adjust volume using the Power/Volume knob. When noise cancellation is enabled, the primary and secondary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphones are used. See Section 5.7 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. Front display shows complete status and radio menus. User-programmable dynamic keys that have their current function labeled on the radio display directly above each button. See Section 7.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. From the Main Display, press this button to access the menu. Also selects highlighted menu items. 29 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Navigation Buttons Navigates menu items. In addition:
Press while on the idle display to access Channel Information (see Section 6.4). Press while on the idle display to display the functions assigned to programmable buttons (see Section 7.4). Press to display Missed Call info. Press to end or reject an ICALL. By default, used to enter text or numbers. Can be programmed for various functions (see Section 7.4). Keypad NOTE 5.2 SOFT DTMF KEYPAD The partial keypad model of the XL-200P supports a soft DTMF keypad. This allows the radio user to utilize a graphical DTMF keypad in place of a physical DTMF keypad. The partial keypad model of the XL-200P supports a soft DTMF keypad. This allows the radio user to utilize a graphical DTMF keypad in place of a physical DTMF keypad. On screens that require keypad entry, press the KEYPAD softkey to display the keypad. Use , , , and to navigate, press the Menu/Select button to select highlighted digit, and then press the ENTER softkey. For example, when placing an Individual Call to a numeric address, the soft DTMF keypad can be used to enter the address as shown:
Figure 5-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad 5.3 BEFORE FIRST USE Make sure XL-200P has:
Fully charged battery Antenna attached Personality and radio programmed using RPM2 Encryption keys loaded if using encrypted channels Personality activated 30 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.4 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME The power switch and volume control are the same knob on top of the radio (see Figure 5-1). Turn the Power/Volume Knob clockwise to power on XL-200P and increase the volume. A minimum volume level can be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. The radio can be programmed to require the entry of a PIN in order to operate the radio. Check with your System Administrator if you forget your PIN. As the PIN is entered, an asterisk is displayed for each digit; the actual value is not displayed. NOTE NOTE 5.5 RADIO DISPLAYS Top Display 5.5.1 The top display (Figure 5-3) shows a summary of status, such as channel number/bank, channel short name, battery, scanning, and emergency mode. The display can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio (see Section 6.6). The channel short name is programmed in RPM2. Figure 5-3: Top Display Front Display 5.5.2 Figure 5-4 shows a sample front display while on the idle screen. The idle screen appears after power up or after exiting from the menus. Figure 5-4: Sample Idle Front Display 31 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Table 5-2 describes some of the icons that may be displayed by the XL-200P. The radio menu also contains an icon glossary in the Utility Menu (see Section 5.7). Icons and their location can be customized using RPM2. Table 5-2: Radio Icons ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION
(Blue) Trunked Signal Strength
(Red) TX Power
(Green) Receive Signal Strength
(No Color) Channel Idle
(Orange) Transmitting Encrypted Battery Fully Charged Battery Level 100% Capacity Battery Level 75% Capacity Battery Level 50% Capacity Battery Level 25% Capacity Battery Level 5% Capacity
(Low Battery Audio Indicator) Battery Level Battery Exhausted
(RX-Only State) Battery Charging Talkaround Enabled Failsoft Bluetooth Enabled
(Blue) Bluetooth Connected Encryption Enabled Global Encryption OTAR Disabled OTAR Registered OTAR Registering OTAR Rekeying Transmit Power Level High Transmit Power Level Low RX Only Speaker Muted TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Monitor On VDOC Receiving Data Transmitting Data Alert(s) Present Vote Scanning Scanning Enabled Emergency RX Mail Noise Cancellation Enabled Fire Speaker Mic Attached Nuisance Channel Conventional Site Unregistered Conventional Site Registered Type 99 Enabled GPS Tracking 32 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.6 STATUS MESSAGES The radio may display various radio Status Messages during operation. These messages are described in Table 5-3. Table 5-3: Status Messages MESSAGE PTT DENIED CALL QUEUED SYSTEM BUSY SCANNING TX EMERGENCY RX EMERGENCY WIDE AREA SCAN INVALID TALKGROUP INVALID UNIT DESCRIPTION P25 Trunked only - The radio or talkgroup is not authorized to operate on the selected system and/or talkgroup. P25 Trunked only - The system has placed the call in a request queue. P25 Trunked only - The system is busy, no channels are currently available, the queue is full, or an individual call is being attempted to a radio that is currently transmitting. The radio is scanning. An emergency call is being transmitted. An emergency call is being received. The radio displays the unit name or unit ID. P25 Trunked only - The radio has entered the Wide Area Scan mode to search for a new system. P25 Trunked only - The current talkgroup is not valid for the current system. This could happen if the site denies registration due to an unrecognized talkgroup ID. P25 Trunked only - The current unit is not valid for the current system. P25 Trunked only - Displayed when the radio is performing a registration/affiliation on a P25 trunking site. REGISTERING CTRL CHANNEL SCAN P25 Trunked only - The control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Control Channel Scan mode to search for the control channel (usually out of range indication). P25 Trunked only - Only displayed if the P25T system is configured for "EnhancedCC"
mode of operation. When the radio cannot find a Control Channel in either the trunked frequency set or the list of discovered adjacencies, the radio is able to perform a full spectrum frequency scan to find a new Control Channel. P25 Modes Only Another user has tried to call or page this radio. The user can view who the caller was by pressing the key. BAND SCANNING MISSED CALL OTAR REKEY COMPLETE 5.7 MENU OTAR Rekey operation completed successfully. Press the Menu/Select button while on the idle display to access the menu. Press the or buttons to navigate the top-level menus, and press the or buttons to navigate the sub-menus. Refer to Figure 5-1 for button location. While in a menu, press the Menu/Select button to choose, activate, or toggle the selected item; similar to an enter key. Table 5-4 provides a high-level overview of the menu layout. Menu options on your radio may vary depending on available features and radio programming. TOP-LEVEL MENUS CALL SUB-MENUS EXIT EMERGENCY TALKAROUND MODE TYPE 99 TOGGLE TONE ENCODE Table 5-4: Menu Navigation DESCRIPTION Exits emergency. See Section 5.31 for more information. Enable/disable talk-around. See Section 5.22 for more information. Enable/disable T99. See Section 5.23 for more information. Analog conventional only - Transmits a programmed tone sequence on the current radio system and channel. See Section 6.19 for more information. 33 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D TOP-LEVEL MENUS CALL
(Continued) SCAN SECURITY MESSAGES SUB-MENUS INDIVIDUAL CALL CHANGE TLKGRP CALL ALERT CHANNEL GUARD AUDIO PLAYBACK START SCAN/STOP SCAN SCAN LISTS ASSIGNED CUSTOM LIST SITE ROAMING ZEROIZE KEYS GLOBAL ENCRYPTION GLOBAL KEY ACTIVE KEYSET KEYLIST OTAR OTAR REKEY RADIO STATUS RADIO MESSAGE TONES KEYPAD TONES DISPLAY SETTINGS:
COLOR SCHEME UTILITY FRONT BACKLIGHT FRONT BRIGHTNESS FRONT TIMEOUT TOP BACKLIGHT TOP BRIGHTNESS TOP TIMEOUT 34 DESCRIPTION Allows you to select an individual for an individual call. See Section 5.14 for more information. Change the selected talkgroup. See Section 5.13. Select a group for Call Alert transmission. See Section 5.24. Select the Transmit and/or Receive Channel Guard tone. See Section 5.21. Replays the last recorded call. See Section 5.26 for more information. Start or stop scan operation. See Sections 5.27 and 5.28. View/Edit available scan lists. See Section 6.14. Create, View, and Edit Custom Scan Lists. See Section 6.14.6. Enable/Disable Wide Area System Scan. See Section 6.14.7. Removes all encryption keys from the radio. See Section 6.20.2. Enable/Disable Global Encryption. See Section 6.20.4. Select the Global Key. Only available if Global Encryption is Enabled. See Section 6.20.4. Select the Active Keyset. See Section 6.20.5. View available key lists. See Section 6.20.6. Enable/disable Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR). See Section 6.20.7. Request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. See Section 6.20.7. Used to send a particular status condition to the site without making a voice call. See Section 6.15. Used to send a particular message to the site without making a voice call. See Section 6.16. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink message. See Section 6.17. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink form. See Section 6.17. Contains received Radio TextLink messages. See Section 6.17. Displays radio faults and alerts. See Section 6.18. Enable or disable Noise Cancellation. See Section 5.16. Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when radio is in the holster or you are getting into a car. Enable or disable radio side tones. Enable or disable tones that sound when the radios keypad buttons are pressed. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front and top displays COLOR SCHEME for optimum visibility in day or night conditions (NORMAL or INVERTED). Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front display backlighting between ON/OFF/MOMENTARY. Press or to dim or brighten the display. When the FRONT BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. Press or to change the time in 0.5 second increments. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the top display backlighting ON/OFF/MOMENTARY. Press or to dim or brighten the display. When the TOP BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. Press or to change the time in 0.5 second increments. TEXTLINK MESSAGES TEXTLINK FORMS TEXTLINK MAILBOX FAULTS/ALERTS AUDIO SETTINGS:
SPEAKER (MUTE/UNMUTE) Mute or unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION PTT 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D TOP-LEVEL MENUS SUB-MENUS DISPLAY SETTINGS (Cont.) TOP ORIENTATION INDICATOR LED BLUETOOTH:
ENABLED (YES/NO) PAIRING MGMT CLOCK SETTINGS:
TIME FORMAT TIME ZONE GPS SETTINGS:
GPS (ENABLED/DISABLED) Enable/disable GPS. POSITION INFO UTILITY
(Continued) ANGULAR UNITS LINEAR UNITS POSITION FORMAT PROGRAM:
ACTIVATE PLAN ACTIVATE PROFILE MAINTENANCE BATTERY INFO RADIO INFO TESTS PH2 LC DISPLAY DISPLAY RSSI TCXO TUNING FEATURE INFO ICON GLOSSARY CHANGE LANGUAGE DESCRIPTION Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the radio changes the top display to be viewed from the back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the indicator LED ON or OFF. Enable/disable Bluetooth. See Section 6.10 for more information. Pair Bluetooth devices with the radio. See Section 6.10 for more information. Select 12 or 24 hour time display format. Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). Displays GPS, Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude information. From this menu, click NEXT to access SA INFO (see Section 6.2). Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units: STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. Set format of displayed position information: Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). View/Activate a personality. See Section 6.1. Change current profile. See Section 5.15. When a smart battery is attached, displays detailed battery status information. When a regular battery is attached, displays battery voltage. Displays radio information, i.e., ESN, software revisions, and firmware revisions. Allows service personnel to run radio tests. For field service use only. When enabled, RSSI is displayed on the RSSI screen and in the bottom of the idle display. -130 dBm is displayed when there is no received signal. For field service personnel only. Improper adjustment will result in loss of communications. Displays what features are enabled on your radio. Defines icons that may be displayed by the radio. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle between available languages. ZONE CHANGE PIN Allows you to change your PIN. View or change zones/systems (see Sections 5.10 and 6.3.1). 35 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.8 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS Depending on radio programming, some menu options described in this manual may not be available. The XL-200P supports three predefined menu layouts: Full, Limited, and Restricted. Table 5-5 details what is available in each layout:
Table 5-5: Predefined Menu Layouts MENU FULL LIMITED RESTRICTED Call Menu Exit Emergency Talkaround Individual Call Change Talkgroup Call Alert/Page Channel Guard Audio Playback Tone Encode T99 Audio Settings Display Settings GPS Settings Clock Settings Bluetooth Settings Scan Menu Enable/Disable Scan View Scan List Edit Zone Scan List View Custom Channels Edit Custom Scan List Custom Scan Site Roam Security Menu Encryption Enable Zeroize Global CKR Enable GCKR Key Select Active Key Set Key List OTAR Enable OTAR Rekey 36 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D MENU FULL LIMITED RESTRICTED Message Menu Radio Status Radio Message Textlink Messages Textlink Forms Textlink Mailbox Faults Program Menu Activate Plan Activate Profile Maintenance Menu Radio Info Battery TCXO Tuning P25 Tests RSSI Display Phase II Display Feature Info Change Language Change PIN Icon Glossary Zone 5.9 ALERT TONES The XL-200P provides audible Alert Tones or beeps to indicate various operating conditions. Some of the most common tones are described in Table 5-6. Table 5-6: Alert Tones TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Ready To Talk Tone Unencrypted (Analog FM or P25 digital) After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1000 Hz tone for 25 ms Ready to Talk Tone Encrypted P25 digital After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1200 Hz tone for 25 ms PTT Denied PTT not possible. Momentary tone is present:
Receive only Key not found PTT button disabled Emergency button disabled Emergency not supported for current channel Clear transmit denied Trunking Channel unavailable 544 Hz tone for 75 ms 37 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Maximum transmit duration expires Maximum transmit duration is exceeded. 5 beeps of 2400 Hz tone and then a 544 Hz tone for as long as PTT is pressed Low Battery Alarm Alarm sounds upon initial detection of low battery and every 30 seconds thereafter. Tone stops upon detection of a battery charging state. Emergency Call Received Radio is receiving an emergency call or priority call. Out of Range Radio fails to find a local control channel. 937 Hz tone for 50 ms Sequence of tones:
Silence for 60 ms 1300 Hz tone for 50 ms 600 Hz tone for 250 ms and 1800 Hz tone for 250 ms Programmable via RPM2:
Disabled (no tone) Slow (tone every 15s) Medium (tone every 10s) Fast (tone every 5s) Tones is 544 Hz tone for 75 ms 5.10 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM A System is a group of channels or talkgroups that share a common set of parameters as programmed in RPM2. For example, a Trunking system defines the parameters needed to communicate on a particular infrastructure by agency or geographical region, such as WACN, System ID, Talkgroups, etc. A conventional system defines the channel set used and any specific signaling attributes (See RPM2 for more information on System attributes). Systems are designated by the XX icon in the Zone/System menu. A Zone is an OPTIONAL container that can hold channels or talkgroups from a variety of systems (see Section 6.3.2). In other words, each member of a Zone belongs to an underlying system. (See RPM2 for more information on Zone attributes). Zones are always listed first in the Zone/System menu and are designated by the icon. A button on the radio can be programmed to scroll through available zones/systems (see Section 7.4). Or Select a zone/system via the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use or to display the ZONE menu. The currently selected zone/system will be highlighted. A personality can have up to 512 systems and up to 50 Zones, independent of banks or channels. 3. Use or to highlight the desired zone/system. The and buttons may be held to scroll repetitively, and the menu will wrap to allow quick access to a particular zone/system 4. Press the VIEW ZONE soft key to view channels in the zone/system, or Select the desired zone/system using the Menu/Select button. 38 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.11 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK The XL-200P can be programmed with 1,250 talkgroups or 1000 channels per personality. Use the Group/Channel knob to select groups/channels 1 - 16. Use the A/B/C/D switch to set the bank. The selected bank is indicated on the display. Bank A: Channel A1 - A16 (1-16) Bank B: Channel B1 - B16 (17-32) Bank C: Channel C1 - C16 (33-48) Bank D: Channel D1 - D16 (49-64) If your system has more than 64 groups/channels, a button on the radio can be programmed for the SEL CHAN/GRP option. This allows you to select a super bank, providing access to groups/channels beyond the first 64. Note that ZONES have a limit of 64 entries per zone and cannot be superbanked. 5.12 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD There are two levels of keypad lock available. Keypad lock and Radio lock. Keypad lock only locks the navigation keys (except for use in unlock), programmable softkeys, and DTMF keypad. Radio lock disables all physical keys and knobs except The 4-position switch PTT Emergency Button Any User Programmable Button (UPB) programmed for Monitor/Clear (This is required to allow Monitor/Clear to function for 2-button emergency clear) The A/B switch, ABCD switch, or a button on the radio can be programmed to lock the keypad/radio. If the keypad was locked via a switch, moving the switch to another position will unlock the keypad. If locked via a button, the navigation keys must be used to enter the unlock sequence of Left, Right, Up Down. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE 39 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.13 GROUP CALLS 5.13.1 Transmit a Group Call A talkgroup is a group of radios that you want to have private conversations with. These groups can be divided into areas such as state, region, county, or large special events. A group call can only be made on digital channels. Turn the Channel/Group knob to select the desired group (see Figure 5-1). Press PTT to transmit. Or A button on the radio can be programmed for DIRECT CHANNEL ENTRY to allow the user to enter the talkgroup/channel number. Press PTT to transmit. Or 1. In P25 Conventional, the talkgroup for the selected channel may be overridden as follows: Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight CHANGE TLKGRP and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight and the desired talkgroup and press the Menu/Select button. After selecting the new talkgroup, the radio returns to the main screen. 5. Press PTT to transmit. 5.13.2 Receive a Group Call When receiving a group call, the status area of the idle display toggles between the Unit Name and the Group Name of the transmitting radio. Note that if either of those names is not programmed the corresponding ID number is displayed. 40 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.14 INDIVIDUAL CALLS An individual call is used to make a call to one radio as opposed to a group of radios. An individual call can only be made on a digital channel. 5.14.1 Transmit an Individual Call 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight INDIVIDUAL CALL and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or to highlight the unit to call and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to make the call. When transmitting an Individual Call, the radio displays the called radios name or Unit ID. If the radio is programmed for Acknowledged Individual Call, the radio displays CALL QUEUED until the callee answers or rejects the call. 6. After the callee answers, press PTT to respond. 7. Press to end the call. How long the radio remains in Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 5.14.2 Receiving an Individual Call 1. When receiving an Individual Call, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. The radio will also display Press to END. 2. Press PTT to respond or to END/REJECT the call. How long the radio remains in the Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 3. The radio rings and indicates a missed call if you do not respond. The ring sounds until you press PTT, view the missed call menu (), change channel/group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4. On the missed call screen, press the DISMISS soft key to clear the entry. 41 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.15 PROFILES The XL-200P supports a Covert profile. The following attributes apply when the Covert profile is active:
The speaker is enabled. All tones are disabled. Keypad tones are disabled. Voice Annunciation is disabled. The front display backlight is disabled The top backlight is turned off. The indicator LED is disabled. All other attributes remain at their current value. To change the currently selected Profile:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press or until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or until the PROFILES menu is displayed. 5. Press or to select the desired Profile (COVERT or NONE) and press the Menu/Select button. A profile change persists across system/channel changes, power cycles, and personality changes. A button on the radio keypad can be used to toggle profiles. See Section 7.4.1. NOTE 5.16 NOISE CANCELLATION The XL-200P features Harris proprietary noise suppression capability to provide clear and crisp voice quality in high-noise environments. This can be used in any mode, including analog and digital communications. The XL-200P has three microphones; two located at the top of the radio (primary) and one on the bottom
(secondary). When noise cancellation is enabled, voice is picked up by the upper left microphone, and noise is picked up from the bottom microphone. In the case where noise cancellation is enabled and a speaker microphone is attached to the XL-200P, talk into the speaker microphone. In this mode, XL-200P top left microphone is used to pick up the surrounding noise, and the other microphones are unused. See Section 5.16.4 for more information. If the bottom (secondary) microphone is blocked, the XL-200P operates as though noise cancellation is turned off. 42 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.16.1 Enable Noise Cancellation To enable Noise Cancellation:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press or until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press or to highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight NOISE CANCELLATION. Toggle Noise Cancellation ENABLED/DISABLED using the Menu/Select button. Refer to Section 6.5 for more information on the Audio Settings menu. 5.16.2 Using Noise Cancellation When using the noise cancellation feature, observe the following:
Verify NOISE CANCELLATION is enabled (see Section 5.16.1). Ensure the primary and secondary microphones are not covered. See Section 5.16.4 for more information on the primary and secondary microphones. Talk within two (2) inches of the primary microphones (see Figure 5-5). Speak clearly, loudly, and with authority. If possible, face the noise source when talking into the radio (see Figure 5-5). In very noisy environments, it is o.k. to yell into the radio. The radio can handle loud input levels. Figure 5-5: Using Noise Cancellation 5.16.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone Unlike a normal microphone system, noise cancellation makes the level of your voice diminish quickly as you move away from the radio. In essence, the radio starts to see your voice as surrounding noise. Whereas, you may be comfortable speaking up to a foot away under normal operation, noise cancellation requires that you hold the radio close. 43 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.16.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone 5.16.4.1 Without a Speaker Microphone Attached The primary microphones are located on top of the radio and the secondary is on the bottom of the radio
(refer to Figure 5-1 for microphone locations). 5.16.4.2 With a Speaker Microphone Attached When a speaker microphone is attached, the radio electronically switches over to use the radios top left microphone as secondary. The microphone on the attached speaker microphone becomes primary. 5.16.5 When using an SCBA Mask When using an SCBA mask, the primary microphone can be held directly against the voice port. If the SCBA has a voice amplifier, the same rule applies. Ensure that the secondary microphone is uncovered. If possible, point the secondary microphone toward the noise source. 5.17 PTT OPTIONS The radio can be programmed via RPM2 with one of the following PTT options:
Radio and Accessory In this mode, when the radio is PTTd the audio source will correspond with the PTT source. If the source of PTT is radio, the audio is routed via the radio microphone. If the source of PTT is an external microphone accessory, the audio is routed via the external microphone accessory. Accessory Only - Any PTT input will have the audio routed through the external microphone accessory. The Bluetooth Speaker Mic is unaffected by this setting. PTTing the Bluetooth Speaker Mic always results in audio being routed via the Bluetooth Speaker Mic. NOTE 5.18 VOICE ANNUNCIATION When enabled via programming, Voice Annunciation provides audible feedback for various radio operations. The radio can be programmed to play an audio message for any or all of the following. This message can be a pre-recorded (canned) message or a user-recorded message. Zone changes Channel changes System changes Encryption On/Off Noise Cancellation On/Off Scan On/Off Talkaround On/Off Monitor Mode On/Off 2 or 4 Position switch change 44 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D For more information on configuring the radio for Voice Annunciation, refer to the Voice Annunciation Feature manual 14221-7200-6110. 5.19 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION A switch or a button on the radio can be programmed to enable/disable encryption. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE Or Turn encryption on or off via the Security Menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use the or button to highlight and select the SECURITY menu. 3. Use the or button to highlight ENCRYPTION. Toggle encryption enabled/disabled using the Menu/Select button. This option is grayed out if any switch is programmed for encryption, or if Encryption Mode in the radios personality is programmed Forced On. If a channel is programmed to be encrypted, an optional key icon appears on the main display when encryption is enabled. The system must also be programmed for encryption. When encryption is enabled and you use any channel not configured for encryption, the radio allows PTT. The signal is transmitted unencrypted. Systems configured for Global Encryption (enabled in the Security menu) can display an optional Global Encryption icon in addition to or instead of a key icon (Section 6.20.3). 5.20 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE When transmit is disabled, all forms of transmission from the radio are disabled, including Bluetooth. This is designed for use in explosive atmospheres. If enabled via programming, use the A/B switch to enable or disable transmit. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE 45 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.21 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channel Guard is Harriss trademark for CTCSS (tone squelch) and CDCSS (digital tone squelch). The Channel Guard menu is only accessible if the System is setup for CG SEL in the radios personality. NOTE To select the Channel Guard tone:
1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Use or to display the CALL menu. 3. Use or to highlight CHANNEL GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or to highlight RECEIVE GUARD or TRANSMIT GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Use or to highlight the desired option from the list and select using the Menu/Select button. 6. The Channel Guard frequency is displayed on the main display. The Channel Info screen and Channel Edit screen will change depending on this selection. See Sections 6.4 and 7.2 for more information. A button on the radio can be programmed for Channel Guard Override (see Section 7.4). NOTE 46 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.22 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) You can bypass the repeater system to communicate directly with other radios on your current channels receive frequency. This is useful if you are out of range of a repeater or if a repeater is busy. You will need to be in range of the other radio. 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight TALKAROUND MODE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle TALKAROUND MODE to ENABLED. 5. The optional Talkaround icon appears. Calls are now made on the receive frequency until you disable talkaround mode via the CALL menu. Power cycling the radio does not disable talkaround. Or A button or switch can be programmed to toggle talkaround enable/disabled. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. If the Talk-Around Indication feature is enabled in RPM2, the radio will play a unique grant tone when a call is placed on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled on a duplex channel. This feature applies to both Analog and P25 Conventional systems. It optionally allows the radio to also play the same tone when it receives a call while operating in simplex or Talk-Around. If configured, the radio plays the tone at the selected volume level. The tone will not play on systems configured with MDC. NOTE Talk-Around Indication can be specified for each individual Analog and P25 Conventional system configured in personality. The following options can be selected, and apply only when the radio is on a simplex channel or when Talk-Around has been enabled by the user:
Disabled: (This is the default option.) When this option is selected, the radio plays the standard grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit Only: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit & Receive: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different Talk-Around grant tone when a call is placed, and at the beginning of a received call. 47 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D In the radio personality, the Alert Tone parameter needs to be enabled for each channel on the Conventional Frequency Set. The Ready To Talk Tone parameter must also be enabled for the Talk Around Indication tone to be played when the radio is keyed. NOTE 5.23 TYPE 99 OPERATION Type 99 is Harris' name for in-band, two-tone sequential signaling. It is a conventional signaling protocol used to control the muting and unmuting of a radio. This signaling is commonly used for selective calling of individual units or groups of units in a conventional system. In Type 99 tone systems, calls are not heard until the radio detects the proper two-tone sequence. This, in conjunction with squelch, prevents the user from hearing noise or undesired conversations. When the radio detects the second tone, it sounds the appropriate Type 99 alert tone. After the second tone stops, the receiver audio path is opened in order for the user to receive messages. 5.23.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight T99 TOGGLE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to change T99 TOGGLE between ENABLED and DISABLED. T99 is displayed in the top of the radio display when Type 99 is enabled. Or A button or switch can be programmed to enable/disable Type 99 (see Section 7.4). 5.23.2 Disable After PTT If this option is programmed in RPM2, Type 99 is disabled after the radio user activates the PTT. This allows the radio user to monitor traffic on the channel (after a PTT action) without pressing the monitor button. Can be used in conjunction with the Auto Reset option (see Section 5.23.3) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 5.23.3 Auto Reset If this option is programmed in RPM2, Type 99 is automatically reset, or turned back on, after 30 seconds. Can be used in conjunction with the Disable After PTT option (see Section 5.23.2) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 48 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.24 CALL ALERT (PAGE) 5.24.1 Send Alert 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight CALL ALERT and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired unit from the list and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to send the page. 5.24.2 Receive Alert 1. When receiving a Call Alert, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. 2. The radio rings and indicates a missed call. The ring sounds continuously until you press PTT, press the CLR MISSED softkey, change group/system, or power cycle the radio. 5.25 DTMF The XL-200P supports the transmission of DTMF tones corresponding to the numbers/characters on the keypad. To overdial numbers/characters, press and hold the PTT button, and then press the corresponding keys one at a time on the keypad. Valid keys for DTMF tones are: (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *, 0, and #). For conventional or P25 Conventional systems, DTMF tones only play if the current system is programmed for DTMF (part of general System configuration). DTMF tones are always enabled for P25 Trunking systems. NOTE 5.26 AUDIO PLAYBACK The Audio Playback feature allows the user to playback a previously received call. Recordings are stored in the radios RAM and are not persistent across power cycles. The radio stores the last five (5) recorded calls up to 1 minute each. A button on the radio can be programmed to replay the last recorded call. To playback the last received call from a button:
1. Press the button programmed for audio playback. The last call received before the button was pressed is played each time the button is pressed. 2. Additional incoming calls will be recorded in the background, but pressing the button continues to replay the captured call until reset. 49 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 3. To reset the feature and allow a new call to be captured, press and hold the button until you hear a 2-
tone chirp. At this point the button can be used to capture an new incoming call. You can also playback one of the last five calls received via the menu. To playback a previously received call from the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight AUDIO PLAYBACK and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Select the desired call from the list (the most recent call is at the top of the list) and press the select button. The selected call will be played. If a button is also programmed for Audio Playback, pressing the button replays the call that selected in the menu. The feature must be reset as above in order to use the button to capture a new call. If a button is not programmed for Audio Playback, then you must navigate back to the menu to play the call again. Any incoming call that occurs during playback preempts the playback. NOTE 5.27 START SCAN This procedure assumes that the scan list has been added and the radio is not in active scan. Refer to Section 6.13 for scan setup or Section 5.28 for stopping scan. Refer to Section 6.14.1.1, Section 6.14.1.2, and Section 6.14.1.3 for home and priority channel descriptions. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight START SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. START SCAN text changes to STOP SCAN. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. 5. The scan icon is displayed on the idle display when scanning is enabled. 50 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Or 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired SCAN LIST and press the START SCAN soft key. Or A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. If a switch is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan is disabled. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE NOTE 5.28 STOP SCAN 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight STOP SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. Or 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the STOP SCAN soft key. 51 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Or A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. If a switch or button is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan are disabled. NOTE See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. NOTE 5.29 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) The monitor function allows you to temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. The type of squelch used depends on an analog or digital channel. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed to start or stop Monitor (see Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches.). For analog channels, there is:
Noise squelch - any received signal breaks squelch. Continuous Tone Coded Squelch (CTCSS) - squelch is selective based on tone code. Continuous Digital Coded Squelch (CDCSS) - squelch is selective based on digital code. For digital channels, there is:
Monitor squelch - any received digital signal breaks squelch. Normal squelch - Received Network Access Code (NAC) must be correct to break squelch. Selective squelch - Received NAC and talkgroup Identification (ID) or unit ID must be correct to break squelch. During encrypted operations, the radio only unmutes when receiving with the same key. NOTE 52 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.30 NUISANCE DELETE A channel can temporarily be deleted from the scan list. The selected channel, priority 1, and priority 2 channels cannot be nuisance deleted. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed for nuisance delete (see Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches). Nuisance delete can only be performed on the active scan list. NOTE To perform nuisance delete from the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the active scan list; when scanning is When scanning is started, stopped, indicates the active scan list. 5. Press or to highlight the desired channel. 6. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 7. Press or to highlight NUISANCE and press the Menu/Select button. 8. The icon appears next to the channel and it will not be scanned. 9. Highlight the channel, press the OPTIONS soft key, and select ADD BACK to add channel back to scan list. If you do not add the channel back to the list, the channel will return to the scan list when you cycle radio power or activate a personality. 10. Press the BACK soft key to exit the channel list. 11. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan list display. 53 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.31 EMERGENCY OPERATION The XL-200P can be programmed to enable emergency mode. Unit name displays on dispatcher console if an emergency signal is received from another XL-200P on a digital channel. 5.31.1 Declaring an Emergency Call 1. Press and hold the emergency button on the radio or the speaker microphone. The length of time you need to hold the button is configured in RPM2. 2. The emergency icon is displayed on the idle display. For digital channels, the radio transmits the talkgroup or radio ID to the dispatch console and receiving radio. The radio can be programmed to have a dedicated emergency channel, which can be activated from analog or digital channels. The radio can also be programmed to send an Emergency Alarm in addition to or in place of the emergency call (P25 modes). The radio goes through transmit and receive cycles if so configured. Speak into the microphone while the radio is transmitting or press PTT to talk. 3. To exit emergency, power cycle the radio or select EXIT EMERGENCY from the CALL menu. If enabled via programming, you can clear an emergency by pressing the button programmed for the Monitor/Clear function and then the emergency button. 5.31.2 Receiving an Emergency Call When receiving an Emergency Call, an alert beep sounds (if tones are enabled) and an emergency indication is displayed. The unit ID and/or unit name of the unit in emergency is displayed. While the emergency display is active, press PTT to respond to the emergency caller. 5.31.3 Stealth Emergency The radio can be programmed with the following emergency behavior:
No audio indications when declaring an emergency. No visual indications when declaring an emergency. Or Or No audio and no visual indications when declaring an emergency. During stealth mode, the radio will not receive any type of call. Once the user presses the PTT button, the radio display and audio return to normal. 54 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5.32 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) MDC-1200 is a legacy in-band signaling protocol that provides the radio with the ability to transmit and receive a unique PTT ID. This PTT ID can be decoded by receiving radios and displayed as a hexadecimal number or an alias string. In addition, MDC-1200 provides radios with the ability to transmit emergency status to a console. Refer to the MDC-1200 Feature Manual, 14221-7200-6000, for complete instructions on configuring and using this feature. 5.32.1 Normal PTT Operation If MDC signaling on PTT press is enabled in RPM2, the radio transmits an MDC PTT ID message when PTT is pressed. If the Sidetone option is enabled in RPM2, the radio plays a Ready-to-Talk (RTT) tone after the MDC pre-signaling has been transmitted. If MDC signaling on PTT release is enabled (in RPM2), the radio transmits post-call MDC signaling when PTT is released. IF STE is enabled (in RPM2), the MDC post-call signaling is transmitted after STE is sent on PTT release only. MDC post-call signaling is also sent when there is a radio unkey due to Carrier Control Timeout
(CCT). Normal CCT alert tones occur prior to unkey. 5.32.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling When the radio receives an MDC PTT ID, it searches the MDC ID Alias List for an alias associated with the ID. If one is found, it displays the alias. If none is found, the radio displays the ID in hexadecimal. 5.32.3 Emergency Declaration Emergency declaration is accomplished by the radio generating an MDC Emergency PTT message. An Emergency is considered acknowledged when the radio receives an Ack To Emergency PTT message with an ID which matches its own ID. If Emergency Audio is enabled and the PTT Sidetone option is enabled, the radio plays the Ready-to-Talk tone after the MDC Emergency PTT signaling is transmitted. If an MDC Alert on ACK is enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone when the MDC emergency is acknowledged. If audio tones are enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone if the emergency is not acknowledged within the programmed number of retries. 55 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6. ADVANCED OPERATIONS 6.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES Personalities contain radio programming information such as frequencies, channels, stations, and talk groups. Up to 10 different personalities can be stored in the radio, but only one can be activated at a time. 6.1.1 View Personalities To view a personality:
1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. An arrow indicates the currently active personality. 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Select VIEW PLAN INFO to view. 6. The radio displays the plans filename. Personality information appears if the field was filled out in RPM2. 6.1.2 Change Active Personality To change the active personality:
1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired personality and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the currently active personality. 56 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 5. Press the YES soft key to confirm personality activation. If the personality has a power-up PIN, you are prompted to enter the PIN before activation continues. 6. The IN PROGRESS screen is displayed while plan activation is in progress. 7. If personality is activated, the radio displays PLAN COMPLETE followed by the name of the personality. Press the OK soft key. You cannot activate a personality when the radio is transmitting an emergency. A FAILED message may be displayed for errors such as invalid syntax in the fill or some other invalid parameter. 6.2 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY Situational Awareness is a feature in which the XL-200P receives SA position from other units configured to send the SA packets. The SA display shows the positions of the other radios (units) relative to the XL-200P. To make use of SA, all radios need to have a uniquely programmed Unit ID. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to select GPS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to select POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press the NEXT soft key. 57 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6. Press or to view the location of each unit. The color of each unit indicates its status as follows. Only one status can be shown at a time and are listed in priority order:
Grey Unselected, no status Red Unselected, In Emergency Orange Unselected, Low Battery Blue - Unselected, Scanning Green Selected, no status Green/Red Selected, In Emergency Green/Orange Selected, Low Battery Green/Blue - Selected, Scanning 7. GPS of this radio is shown by the center dot as follows:
Green Tracking Orange Last known position Red Searching 8. Press or to zoom the display distance of current unit. 9. Press the OPTIONS soft key. From here, select UNIT INFO to display details about the selected unit, select REFRESH to update information, or select EXIT. 6.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS 6.3.1 Command Tactical Zone A Command Tactical Zone is defined at the radio. A Command Tactical Zone is reset when a Personality is activated. NOTE To create a Command Tactical Zone:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the ZONE menu. 3. Press or to highlight <USER-DEFINED> and press the VIEW ZONE soft key. 58 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Press or to select EDIT ZONE to create a zone, or RENAME ZONE to rename the Command Tactical Zone (up to 16 characters are allowed). 6. Press or to scroll through existing systems. Press or to highlight desired channel/group. 7. Press the Menu/Select button to add or remove channel/group. 8. After adding all desired channels/groups, press the BACK soft key. 9. Activate the Command Tactical Zone by selecting the SET ACTIVE soft key on the USER DEFINED screen, or by pressing the Menu/Select button when <USER DEFINED> is highlighted on the Zone menu. 10. After a creating a Command Tactical Zone, select OPTIONS to edit the Command Tactical Zone, delete channels/groups, clear the zone, and rename the zone. 6.3.2 Mixed System Zone Mixed System Zones are defined in RPM2 and cannot be edited on the radio. If a Mixed System Zone is not configured in RPM2, it will not appear on the radio. Up to 50 Mixed System Zones can be defined. You can view details about each channel/group. A user programmable button can be defined to scroll through just the mixed system zones. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the ZONE menu. 3. Press or to highlight the desired zone (Note: Zones are indicated by icon) and select VIEW ZONE to view the groups/channels in the the zone list. 59 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.4 CH INFO MENU The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu displays information about the currently selected channel. The information displayed varies between conventional and trunked systems. 1. Press while on the idle display. 2. Press or to scroll through the programmed channel settings. CONVENTIONAL OR P25 CHANNELS ONLY:
3. Press the EDIT soft key. 4. Enter the password. You may now select and change the values of the displayed channel parameters. The password remains active until power cycle. Refer to Section 7.2 for more information. 6.5 AUDIO SETTINGS Set audio settings such as speaker mute, noise cancellation, PTT, and tones. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to scroll through available audio settings. Press the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
SPEAKER - Mute or Unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION - Enable or disable noise cancellation. Noise cancellation reduces background noise during transmit. PTT - Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when the radio is in a holster or you are getting into a car. TONES - Enable or disable alert tones (see Table 5-6). KEYPAD TONES - Enable or disable keypad tones. When enabled, the radio plays a tone when a button on the keypad is pressed. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit menu. 60 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY Menu. 3. Press or to highlight DISPLAY SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
COLOR SCHEME - Change the color scheme of the top and front displays for optimum viewing in day/night conditions. FRONT BACKLIGHT - Turn front display backlight on, off, or momentary. FRONT BRIGHTNESS - Set brightness level of front display. A level of 0 has same effect as turning off backlight. FRONT TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. TOP BACKLIGHT - Specify how long the top displays backlight will remain lit: MOMENTARY, ON, or OFF. TOP BRIGHTNESS - Set the brightness level of the top display. A level of 0 turns off top display and indicator (TX/RX) LED. TOP TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. TOP ORIENTATION - Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the XL-200P changes top display to be viewed from back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. INDICATOR LED - Toggle the indicator LED ON/OFF. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 61 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.7 GPS SETTINGS The GPS SETTINGS menu item only appears if enabled in RPM2 and the feature is installed. NOTE 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight GPS SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
GPS - Enable or disable internal GPS. POSITION INFO - See Section 6.8. LINEAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units:
STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. ANGULAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. POSITION FORMAT- Set format of displayed position information:
Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 6.8 POSITION INFO The Position Info screen displays the radio users location information. GPS must be enabled in the GPS Settings (see Section 6.7). 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to scroll through available location information. 62 6.9 WI-FI 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D The XL-200P supports programming via Wi-Fi. Refer to Appendix A for information on configuring Wi-
Fi. To enable Wi-Fi programming mode on the radio:
1. Ensure the radio is powered off. 2. Press and hold the bottom side button and PTT button (see Figure 4-1). Figure 6-1: Enabling Wi-Fi 3. Power on the radio. 4. The WIFI INSTALL ACTIVE screen The radio displays DISCONNECTED if not connected to a wireless network, or CONNECTED if connected to a wireless network. is displayed (Figure 6-2). Figure 6-2: Wi-Fi Install Active 63 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.10 BLUETOOTH The BLUETOOTH menu item only appears if enabled in RPM2 and if the feature is installed. NOTE 6.10.1 Enable Bluetooth 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight ENABLED and press the Menu/Select button to toggle YES/NO. 6.10.2 Pair Devices 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight PAIRING MGMT and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Make sure device being paired is powered on and has discovery mode enabled in order to pair with the XL-200P. If no devices are found and Bluetooth is enabled, only the ADD NEW soft key is available. If devices are paired, the OPTIONS soft key appears. 6. Press the ADD NEW soft key to select a device to pair. 64 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 7. A list of available Bluetooth devices appears. 8. Press the REFRESH soft key to refresh the device list if the desired device does not appear. 9. Press or highlight the desired device and press the PAIR softkey. 10. Pairing progress is displayed. For Bluetooth 2.0 devices, a pin code screen appears. Enter the pin code and select OK. For Bluetooth 2.1 devices, a PASSKEY accept/deny screen appears. Select ACCEPT. Accept the passkey on the Bluetooth 2.1 device as well. 11. A message appears when pairing is complete. Select OK. The paired device is then displayed in the PAIRED DEVICES list. 6.11 CLOCK SETTINGS 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight CLOCK SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and Menu/Select button to change settings as desired:
TIME FORMAT- Set 12 or 24 hour time display format. TIME ZONE - Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated
(UTC). 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit. 65 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.12 BATTERY SETTINGS 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight MAINTENANCE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight BATTERY INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Battery information is displayed (state, voltage, capacity, and chemistry). Use only Harris approved batteries. Injury could occur from using incorrect battery. WARNING 6.13 SELECT LANGUAGE To change the language displayed by the XL-200P:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight CHANGE LANGUAGE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight the desired language and press the Menu/Select button. 66 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.14 SET UP SCAN These procedures are used to set up the scan list, home channels, and priority channels. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. Refer to the following sections. NOTE When using Preemptive Priority Scan, the frequencies in the list need to be unique. 6.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels 6.14.1.1 Default Channel This is the currently selected channel and is the channel you transmit on by default when you press PTT while the radio is actively scanning and is not responding to a just received call. Responding to a call the radio just received while scanning is called hang time. If hang time is set to 0 in RPM2, the radio always transmits on the default channel in scan. 6.14.1.2 Priority 1 Channel This channel will be scanned more often than other channels in the list and will be scanned in between every other channel in the scan list. An example scan sequence would be P1 (priority 1), C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, etc. In addition, the priority channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P1, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P1. 6.14.1.3 Priority 2 Channel This channel will also be scanned more often than others. An example scan sequence would be P1, C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, P2, C5, P1, C6, P1, C7, P1, C8, P2, C9 etc. In addition, this channel will be scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P2, the radio will drop C3 and switch to P2. Additionally, activity on P1 can also preempt P2, but P2 cannot preempt P1. 6.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning Trunked/conventional scanning adds the ability to scan multiple conventional and P25 conventional channels while still maintaining P25 trunked radio operation. In essence, the radio is able to scan a conventional scan list while still receiving a P25 trunked control channel and receiving P25 trunked calls. Selection of which conventional scan list is associated with a given trunked system is done in RPM2 and cannot be changed on the radio. However, a user with access to the necessary menu layout
(see Section 5.8) is allowed to edit the scan list members (both trunked groups and conventional channels on the selected Conventional Priority System). As the number of conventional channels being scanned increases, the time between scanning each channel increases (roughly 250 milliseconds per channel), with 67 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D the consequent increase in the number of calls that will late-enter. In order to avoid missing calls, it is recommended to keep the number of conventional channels being scanned to eight (8) or fewer. The trunking site must have roaming set to Enhanced CC. NOTE 6.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) If vote scan is enabled via RPM2, the radio automatically selects the strongest signal ensuring that the best audio quality is delivered to the user. If vote scan is enabled, the radio is always scanning. You cannot stop scanning, start normal scanning, or monitor the channel. The scanning icon on the idle screen indicates that the radio is vote scanning versus, regular scanning. NOTE If Talkaround is enabled, Vote Scan is disabled until Talkaround is disabled again. 6.14.4 Edit Scan List Depending on the scan list options selected in RPM2, you may be able to add or remove channels/groups from the scan list. 1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to select SCAN LISTS. 4. Press or to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press or to highlight channel/group. 6. Select OPTIONS. 7. Press or to select ADD CHAN/DELETE CHAN, SET PRI1, SET PRI2, REMOVE PRI, or NUISANCE/ADD BACK. When a channel is not grayed out in the list, DELETE CHAN appears. When a channel/group is grayed out (not in list), ADD CHAN appears. 8. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle selection. 68 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels Priority channels are scanned more often than non-priority channels. Note that P1 and P2 can only be set if configured as Keypad and the scan list is not set to Fixed in RPM2. 1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to highlight channel/group. 5. Select OPTIONS. 6. Press or to highlight SET PRI1 or SET PRI2 and press the Menu/Select button. A Priority 1 channel appears with a P1 and a Priority 2 channel appears with a P2. 7. Select REMOVE PRI to remove priority. 6.14.6 Custom Scan Lists The Mixed Zone Scan (MZS) feature gives the user the capability to scan based on a custom scan list that is assigned at the system level. The Custom Scan (CS) list can contain System and Channel/Group configurations across P25 Trunked, P25 Conventional, and Analog Systems. When a Custom Scan List is assigned to a P25T system, the radio can scan P25T, P25C and Analog systems. When assigned to a P25C or Analog system, the radio only scans conventional channels. MZS also gives the user the capability to scan beyond the selected system group set. P25T Scan When a custom scan list is assigned to a P25T system, the user has the ability to scan P25T, P25C, and Analog groups/channels. All P25T systems must have the same WACN, System ID, and Unit ID to be added to the custom scan list. If P25C and/or analog channels are added to the custom scan list, the radio will scan them using the Trunked/Conventional scan feature described in section 6.14.2, and will override any other conventional scan list that may have been programmed in RPM2. P25C and Analog Scan When a custom scan lists is assigned to a P25C or Analog System, the user has the ability to scan P25C and Analog channels. P25T systems are ignored. Custom scan list can be created in RPM or at the radio. The radio supports up to 10 Custom Scan lists, with up to 100 channels/groups in each. 69 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.14.6.1 Create Custom Scan List To create a custom scan list at the radio:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight ASSIGNED CUSTOM LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the OPTIONS softkey. 5. Select ADD SCAN LIST. 6. Press or to highlight the newly added scan list and press the VIEW/EDIT soft key. 7. Press or to display the desired system. 8. Press or to highlight the desired group/channel and press the OPTIONS softkey. From here, you can add/delete channels from the scan list, and set/remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 channels. When a custom scan list is selected, that list is scanned any time scanning is enabled for any Trunked, conventional, or P25 Conventional system. To scan only the channels assigned to a particular system, custom scanning must be turned off. NOTE 70 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked Only) Wide Area System Scan (WASCAN) causes the radio to roam across mobile systems when the currently selected system's control channel is lost. The radio will scan the control channels of other systems. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press or to highlight SITE ROAMING and press the Menu/Select button to toggle Wide Area System Scan ENABLED/DISABLED. 4. Select BACK to exit the scan menu. 6.15 RADIO STATUS The status feature is used to send a particular status condition to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 status conditions programmed into the radio. For each status defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio status (see Section 7.4). NOTE 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight RADIO STATUS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select desired status. 71 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.16 RADIO MESSAGE The message feature is used to send a particular message to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 messages programmed into the radio. For each message defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio message (see Section 7.4). NOTE 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight RADIO MESSAGE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use or and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select the desired message. 6.17 RADIO TEXTLINK Radio TextLink provides short text messaging functionality for radios. Because of the difficulty of entering text messages on a radio, predefined "canned" messages and predefined replies can be stored in the radio. To facilitate sending messages where information must be provided at send time, text message forms will also be stored in the radio. A form contains up to four (4) text prompts, for which the operator enters alphanumeric values before sending the message. 6.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK MESSAGES and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to display the desired message. Press the Menu/Select button to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 72 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms Form messages are displayed and stored in the radio as a message in which each field to be filled is indicated by a question mark (?) followed by one or more asterisks(*). The number of asterisks indicates the maximum number of alphanumeric characters allowed for that field. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK FORMS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press or to display the desired message and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Enter text into blank field(s) (up to eight alphanumeric characters) and press the NEXT soft key. 6. Select SEND to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 6.17.3 View Received Messages When the 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. icon appears on the idle display, there are Radio TextLink messages waiting to be read. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight TEXTLINK MAILBOX and press the Menu/Select button. From the mailbox, select OPTIONS to delete messages, view details of messages, and reply to messages. 73 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.18 FAULTS/ALERTS is displayed on the idle display when there is a fault. To view and clear faults/alerts:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press or to highlight FAULTS/ALERTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Fault messages are displayed. Press or to highlight the desired fault. Press the OPTIONS soft key delete faults. Press the DETAILS soft key to view details for the highlighted fault. Possible faults include:
BATTERY FAULT- Replace battery. EEPROM FAULT - Contact Harris. RF FAULT - Contact Harris. OVERCURRENT - Check antenna and antenna connection. Try replacing antenna. INVALID SYSTEM - Feature not installed. CHANNEL FAULT - Channel frequency programmed is not valid for this radio. 5. If you view but do not delete the fault, the alert icon goes away on the idle display. Contact Harris for assistance with diagnosing a fault. NOTE 74 6.19 TONE ENCODE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Tone Encode is a generic tone encoding scheme for call identification when transmitting on a conventional system. It supports generic user-definable tone encode (up to 15 tones), Type 99 (up to 2 tones) and 5/1 Tone (up to 5 tones) encoding formats. Tone encoding schemes are used to transmit calls to one or more target radios that have been programmed with the correct tone decode sequence. When the receiving radio detects its tone decode sequence, it unmutes on the call. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the CALL menu. 3. Press or to highlight TONE ENCODE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Select the desired Tone Encode option from the list. 6.20 ENCRYPTION 6.20.1 Create and Load Keys Refer to the following documentation for advanced programming and setup instructions:
Harris OTAR Overview Manual - MM-008069-001 Network Key Manager Installation and Configuration Manual - MM-008070-001 Harris UAS Key Management Application Manual - MM-008068-001 Harris Key Manager Key Admin Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019423 Harris Key Manager Key Loader Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019424 Motorola KVL 3000 Plus Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide Motorola KVL 4000 Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide 75 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio It may be necessary to remove keys because of compromise or expiration. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or highlight ZEROIZE KEYS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the YES softkey to remove the keys. This will also remove the keysets. 6.20.3 Protected Keys The Protected Keys feature transfers P25 Voice Keys, from Harris Key Loader to the radio, that have been wrapped (AES) or encrypted (DES) with Key Protection Keys (KPKs). KPKs are nothing more than unprotected Key Encryption Keys (KEKs). The KPKs need to be loaded into the radio before the Protected Keys are loaded. Once loaded into the radio, the KPKs are used to unwrap (AES) or decrypt
(DES) the Protected Keys. 6.20.4 Global Encryption Global Encryption can be enabled when encryption keys are loaded on the radio and the selected Zone/System is encrypted. When Global Encryption is enabled on the radio, a Global Key is used for all encrypted transmissions until:
Global Encryption is disabled. A new personality is activated. The active keyset is changed. The system is changed. Global Encryption behavior is available on all channels that support encrypted communications. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight GLOBAL ENCRYPTION. Press the Menu/Select button. 76 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 4. Press or to highlight the desired Global Key and press the Menu/Select button to enable Global Encryption. 5. To change the selected global key, press or to highlight GLOBAL KEY on the SECURITY menu. Press the Menu/Select key. 6. Press or to highlight the global key and press the Menu/Select button. RPM2 allows Key Numbers to be given Key Names. 7. The optional global key icon is displayed on the main display. 6.20.5 Select Keyset 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to select ACTIVE KEYSET. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle to the inactive keyset. 6.20.6 View Key List 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to select KEY LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. The available key lists are displayed. 77 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 6.20.7 OTAR Configuration OTAR is the over-the-air-rekeying from a KMF and must be enabled for the digital only channel using RPM2. For OTAR operation, the appropriate KEKs must be loaded into the radio using the Harris Key Loader or a KVL device. The KMF Configuration must include the RSI of the KMF and the appropriate Message Number Period. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press or to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press or to highlight OTAR and press the Menu/Select button to toggle ENABLED/DISABLED. 4. Press or to select OTAR REKEY and press the Menu/Select button to request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. OTAR REKEY is only enabled if the radio has successfully registered for data operations. NOTE 78 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 7. PROGRAMMING This section provides information on front panel programming. Programming can also be accomplished by creating a plan using a computer with RPM2 installed. 7.1 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 Radio Personality Manager (RPM2) is used for the bulk of programming the XL-200P. With RPM2, you can fully program the XL-200P using cable 12082-0410-A1. Removing power during radio programming, or programming the radio with low battery power could corrupt installation of firmware. CAUTION NOTE Ensure that the radio is turned off before connecting the programming cable. After the cable is connected, then power on the radio. 7.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channels can be edited from the Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display. Most of the displayed channel parameters can be modified here. Channel edits persist across a power cycle. Loading a personality clears any channel edits. Available parameters vary depending on whether the channel is a P25 or analog channel. 1. From the main display, press to access the CH INFO screen. 2. Press or to scroll through the programmed channel settings. 3. Press the EDIT soft key. Only authorized users should attempt channel editing. CAUTION 4. Enter the password programmed via RPM2. You do not have to re-enter the password until you power cycle the radio. 5. Press the ENTER soft key. 6. Highlight and select the parameter to edit. For P25 channels, modify remaining channel settings:
CHANNEL NAME - Up to 16 alphanumeric characters are allowed. RX FREQUENCY - Receive frequency. Note that if the new frequency is invalid, the display reverts to the old frequency (Table 7-1). TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER Transmit power. Toggle between LOW and HIGH. 79 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D TALKGROUP Select a talkgroup for the channel. Talkgroup name cannot be set here. RX NAC - Network Access Code (NAC) radio uses for Normal squelch in receive. TX NAC - NAC radio transmits to break Normal squelch on receiving radio. P25 SQUELCH - Select type the radio uses in receive. Select NORMAL, SELECTIVE, or MONITOR. RX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. For a digital channel, the RX CHAN GUARD is used to receive from a Conventional analog channel that is on the same frequency and uses the selected Channel Guard. RX CODE - Code radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. RX TONE - Tone radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. 7. For analog channel, modify remaining channel settings:
CHANNEL NAME - Up to 16 alphanumeric characters are allowed. TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER - Transmit power. Toggle between HIGH and LOW. RX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. RX TONE - Tone radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CTCSS. RX CODE - Code radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CDCSS. RX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 5.21. NOTE TX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in transmit. Select None, CTCSS, or CDCSS. TX TONE - Tone sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CODE - Code sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 5.21. NOTE 8. An asterisk is displayed in front of the CHANNEL label on the main display when a channel has been edited. The asterisk is NOT shown for TX Power or Talkgroup changes. When the only item edited is the TX or RX CHAN GUARD values, and then CHAN GUARD edit is Disabled, the asterisk goes away and the channel is no longer considered edited. This is the only editable item for which this is true. NOTE 80 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Table 7-1: Valid Frequencies FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESOLUTION 136 - 174 MHz 380 - 520 MHz 762 - 870 MHz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 6250 kHz 7.3 OTAP The XL-200P supports Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) via ProFile Manager. RPM2 creates, modifies and stores personality information while ProFile Manager delivers the personality over the network to the desired radios. ProFile Manager also contains the ability to read personality information over-the-air and save the files, so that RPM2 can modify the information if necessary. You can interrupt the programming process, if necessary, by depressing the Push-to-Talk (PTT) button or declaring an emergency. Once a radio personality update is successfully completed, the radio automatically resets itself, switches to the new personality, and returns to normal operation. For more information on using ProFile Manager, refer to software release notes AE/LZT 123 3263/1. 7.4 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES 7.4.1 Programmable Buttons Press while on the main display to view the functions assigned to the programmable buttons. The programmable buttons are programmed using RPM2. A delay of 0 to 10 seconds can be defined in RPM2 for the programmable buttons. Table 7-2 lists and describes the functions that can be programmed to the buttons:
FUNCTION No Operation Monitor Toggle Monitor/Clear Audio Playback Lock Keypad Nuisance Delete System Up System Down System Up Wrap System Down Wrap Zone Up Zone Down Table 7-2: Programmable Button Options DESCRIPTION Toggles Monitor On/Off. Temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. Also, press this button followed by the emergency button to clear an emergency. Accesses the AUDIO PLAYBACK menu. See Section 5.26. Locks the DTMF keypad, programmable function keys and navigation keys. Performs a Nuisance Delete. See Section 5.30 for more information. Scrolls up through the list of available systems, stopping at the top of the list. Scrolls down through the list of available systems, stopping when the end of the list is reached. Scrolls up through the list of available systems, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. Scrolls down through the list of available systems, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping at the top of the list. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping when the end of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. 81 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D DESCRIPTION FUNCTION Zone Up Wrap Zone Down Wrap Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Select the channel/group bank. If your system has more than 64 channels, this allows you to select a channel group with channels 65 to 127, 128 to 191, etc. Drop or terminate any group call that the radio receives. Sends a preconfigured status. See Section 6.15 for more information. Sends a preconfigured message. See Section 6.16 for more information. Toggle TX Power between LOW and HIGH. Enable/disable scan. Channel/Group Bank Select Drop Call Send Status Send Message TX Power High/Low Scan Enable Secure Enable Toggle Toggles Encryption Mode On/Off. See Sections 5.19 and 6.20 for information on Home Adjust Squelch Front Backlight Top Orient Top Backlight Flashlight Mode Speaker Mute Toggle Talkaround Voice Announce Channel Guard Override Individual Call OTAR Rekey GPS SA Info Site Roaming Profile Toggle Numeric Channel Entry Encryption. Goes to home channel. Allows the user to adjust the analog squelch level. Toggles front displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Toggles Top Display Front/Back. Toggles the top displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Press and hold to turn on the front and top display backlights. Release the button to turn off both displays. Toggles Speaker Muted/Unmuted. Toggles Talkaround On/Off. See Section 5.22. Enable/disable Voice Annunciation. See Section 5.18 Allow user to pick a different Channel Guard setting for the current channel. Initiate an Individual Call. Initiate an OTAR rekey. See Section 6.20.7. Display GPS Situational Awareness (SA) screen. Enable/disable Site roaming. Site Roaming allows the radio to roam to another site. Toggles between the currently active profile (if one has been selected) and no profile. Allows number channel entry. 7.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch The programmable A/B switch can be programmed for multiple functions, including:
Table 7-3: Programmable /O Switch Options FUNCTION Clear/Secure Scan Talkaround Keypad Lock/Unlock TX Enable/Disable Enable/disable encryption. Turn scan operation on/off. Enable/disable talkaround. Locks/unlocks the keypad. Enables/Disables transmit. DESCRIPTION 82 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 7.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch Sections 7.4.3.1 and 7.4.3.2 describe the various functions that can be programmed to the A/B/C/D switch. 7.4.3.1 Single-Instance Features Single-instance features can only be assigned to one switch position at a time. If one of these features is programmed to the A/B/C/D switch, other means of accessing that feature are disabled (i.e., two-position switch, programmable buttons, call menu, etc.). FUNCTION No Function Talkaround Scan TX Power High TX Power Low Keypad Lock Radio Lock Table 7-4: Single-Instance Features DESCRIPTION No function programmed to switch. See Section 5.22. Enables scanning. Sets transmission power level to High. Changing to a Tx Power High position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power High position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Sets transmission power level to Low. Changing to a Tx Power Low position overrides the current personality or user setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power Low position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Locks DTMF, programmable, and navigation soft keys. When set, prevents the radio software from responding to the following physical inputs on the radio:
Volume Knob Change (power off is not prevented) Channel Knob Side User-Programmable Buttons and Keypad (DTMF, programmable, and 2-Position Switch navigation/soft keys) NOTE: Exception is the emergency button and if any key is programmed for Monitor/Clear, it can be used with the emergency button to clear emergency, if so programmed. Selects channels 1-16 in position A; 17-32 in position B; 33-48 in position C; and 49-64 in position D. Channel Bank NOTE If Channel Bank is selected for any single position, all 4 positions (A, B, C, and D) will be set to Channel Bank. 83 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Indexed Features 7.4.3.2 These features can be assigned to any number of positions as long as each index value selected for it is unique across multiple assignments of the same feature; for example, you cannot assign a Zone with a particular index (e.g., ZONE A) to both positions A and B. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Table 7-5: Indexed Features Zone Selection Sets to the Zone index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed zone assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that zone. This has the resulting effects:
This sets the channel knob to be zone-based system/channel selection just like selecting a zone from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the Zone selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the zone where the switch assignment is set. When changing away from a Zone assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. Sets to the System index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed System assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that System. This has the resulting effects:
This sets the channel knob to be system-based channel selection, just like selecting a system from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the System selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the system where the switch assignment is set. System Selection When changing away from a System assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. 7.5 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS Top display 7.5.1 The top display has space for up to seven configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:
Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Scan/Vote Scan enabled Talkaround enabled Emergency mode active The radio can be programmed to change the color of the top display backlight relative to the currently selected channel/group. The backlight remains the color programmed for the currently selected channel/group except during an emergency, in which case the color changes to orange. 84 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D Front display 7.5.2 The front display has space for up to 10 configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:
Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Global Encryption Talkaround enabled TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Speaker Muted Monitor OTAR Status (Disabled, Registering, Registered, Rekeying) TX Power level (Low/High/RX Only) GPS Status VDOC Failsoft Data Status (TX/RX) Alert(s) RX Mail Noise Cancellation Enabled Type 99 Enabled Conventional Site Status (Unregistered/Registered) 85 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 8. REFERENCE 8.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES Refer to Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies for a list of maritime frequencies per United States Coast Guard
(USCG), National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), and Canadian Department Fisheries and Oceans, August 2009:
United States (US) International (Intl) Canada (CA) Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies FREQUENCY SHIP
(MHZ) T: 156.05 R: 160.65 T/R:
156.05 T: 156.10 R: 160.70 T: 156.15 R: 160.75 T: 156.20 R: 160.80 T/R:
156.20 T: 156.25 R: 160.85 T/R:
156.25 T/R:
156.30 SHORE
(MHZ) T: 160.65 R: 156.05 T/R:
156.05 T: 160.70 R: 156.10 T: 160.75 R: 156.15 T: 160.80 R: 156.20 T/R:
156.20 T: 160.85 R: 156.25 T/R:
156.25 T/R:
156.30 T: 156.35 R: 160.95 T/R:
156.35 T/R:
156.40 T: 160.95 R: 156.35 T/R:
156.35 T/R:
156.40 T/R:
156.45 T/R:
156.45 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, Vessel Traffic Service (VTS). New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Department Fisheries Ocean (DFO)/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. Commercial fishing in east coast area International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations or VTS in Houston, New Orleans and Seattle areas. US: Intership Safety International: Intership Canada: May be used for search and rescue communications between ships and aircraft. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial US: Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Also assigned for intership in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Boater Calling. Commercial and Non-Commercial. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. CHANNEL US INTL CA 1 2 3 4a 5a 6 7a 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1a 5a 6 7a 8 9 86 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D CHANNEL US INTL CA 10 10 10 FREQUENCY SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) T/R:
156.50 T/R:
156.50 11 11 11 T/R:
156.55 T/R:
156.55 12 12 12 T/R:
156.60 T/R:
156.60 13 13 13 T/R:
156.65 T/R:
156.65 14 14 14 T/R:
156.70 T/R:
156.70 15 15 15 T/R:
156.75 T/R:
156.75 16 16 16 T/R:
156.80 T/R:
156.80 17 17 17 T/R:
156.85 T/R:
156.85 18 T: 156.90 R: 161.50 18a 18a T/R:
156.90 T: 156.95 R: 161.55*
19 19a 19a T/R:
156.95 T: 161.50 R: 156.90 T/R:
156.90 T: 161.55*
R: 156.95 T/R:
156.95 20 20 20 T: 157.00 R: 161.60 T: 161.60 R: 157.00 CHANNEL USAGE US: Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. US: Commercial. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Intership Navigation Safety (Bridge-to-bridge). Ships >20m length maintain a listening watch on this channel in US waters. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Environmental (Receive only). Used by Class C Emergency Position-
Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRBs). International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1-watt maximum power. May also be used for on-
board communications. US: International Distress, Safety and Calling. Ships required to carry radio, US Coast Guard (USCG), and most coast stations maintain a listening watch on this channel. International: International Distress, Safety and Calling Canada: International Distress, Safety and Calling US: State Control International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1 watt maximum power. May also be used for on-
board communications. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: Towing - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard. Pacific Pilots - British Columbia coast area. US: Port Operations (Duplex) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Port operations only with 1 watt maximum power. 87 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D FREQUENCY CHANNEL US INTL CA 20a 21 SHIP
(MHZ) T/R:
157.00 T: 157.05 R: 161.65*
21a 21a T/R:
157.05
- -
21b 22 T: 157.10 R: 161.70 22a 22a T/R:
157.10 23 23 23a 24 24 25 25 23b 24 25 T: 157.15 R: 161.75 T/R:
157.15
- -
T: 157.20 R: 161.80 T: 157.25 R: 161.85 25b 26 27 28 28b 60 T: 157.30 R: 161.90 T: 157.35 R: 161.95 T: 157.40 R: 162.00
- -
T: 156.025 R: 160.625 T: 156.075 R: 160.675 61a T/R:
156.075 T: 156.125 R: 160.725 62 62a T/R:
156.125 26 26 27 27 28 28 60 61 61a 88 SHORE
(MHZ) T/R:
157.00 T: 161.65*
R: 157.05 T/R:
157.05 T/R:
161.65 T: 161.70 R: 157.10 T/R:
157.10 T: 161.75 R: 157.15 T/R:
157.15 T/R:
161.75 T: 161.80 R: 157.20 T: 161.85 R: 157.25 T/R:
161.85 T: 161.90 R: 157.30 T: 161.95 R: 157.35 T: 162.00 R: 157.40 T/R:
162.00 T: 160.625 R: 156.025 T: 160.675 R: 156.075 T/R:
156.075 T: 160.725 R: 156.125 T/R:
156.125 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Coast Guard Liaison and Maritime Safety Information Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced on channel 16. Canada: For communications between Canadian Coast Guard and non-
Canadian Coast Guard stations only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Also assigned for operations in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D CHANNEL US INTL CA 63 FREQUENCY SHIP
(MHZ) T: 156.175 R: 160.775 63a 63a T/R:
156.175 64 64 T: 156.225 R: 160.825 64a 64a T/R:
156.225 T: 156.275 R: 160.875 65 65a 65a T/R:
156.275 SHORE
(MHZ) T: 160.775 R: 156.175 T/R:
156.175 T: 160.825 R: 156.225 T/R:
156.225 T: 160.875 R: 156.225 T/R:
156.275 66 T: 156.325 R: 160.925 66a 66a T/R:
156.325 T: 160.925 R: 156.325 T/R:
156.325 67 67 67 T/R:
156.375 T/R:
156.375 68 68 68 T/R:
156.425 T/R:
156.425 69 69 69 T/R:
156.475 T/R:
156.475 70 70 70 T/R:
156.525 T/R:
156.525 71 71 71 T/R:
156.575 T/R:
156.575 72 72 72 T/R:
156.625 T/R:
156.625 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations and Commercial, VTS. New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. Canada: Tow Boats - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Search and rescue and antipollution operations on the Great Lakes. Towing on the Pacific Coast. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River areas with 1 watt maximum power. Intership in inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. 1 watt marina channel - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-bridge communications in lower Miss. River. Intership only. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: For marinas, yacht clubs and pleasure craft. US: Non-Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Digital Selective Calling (voice communications not allowed) International: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling Canada: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. Marinas and yacht clubs - east coast and on Lake Winnipeg. US: Non-Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area 89 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D CHANNEL US INTL CA 73 73 73 FREQUENCY SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) T/R:
156.675 T/R:
156.675 74 74 74 T/R:
156.725 T/R:
156.725 75 75 75 T/R:
156.775 T/R:
156.775 76 76 76 T/R:
156.825 T/R:
156.825 77 77 77 T/R:
156.875 T/R:
156.875 T: 161.525 R: 156.925 T/R:
156.925 T: 161.575 R: 156.975 T/R:
156.975 T: 161.625 R: 157.025 T/R:
157.025 T: 161.675 R: 157.075 T/R:
157.075 T: 161.725 R: 157.125 T/R:
157.125 T: 161.775 R: 157.175 T/R:
157.175 T/R:
161.775 78 T: 156.925 R: 161.525 78a 78a T/R:
79 79a 79a T/R:
80 80a 80a T/R:
81 81a 81a T/R:
82 82a 82a T/R:
83 156.925 T: 156.975 R: 161.575 156.975 T: 157.025 R: 161.625 157.025 T: 157.075 R: 161.675 157.075 T: 157.125 R: 161.725 157.125 T: 157.175 R: 161.775 83a T/R:
157.175
- -
83b 83a 90 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. US: Port Operations International: Port Operations Canada: VTS and Ship Movement British Columbia coast area. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. US: Port Operations (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Pilotage - British Columbia coast area; 25 watts. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1 watt maximum power. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Non-Commercial Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Government only - Environmental protection operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US. Government only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard and other Government agencies. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D FREQUENCY SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) T: 157.225 R: 161.825 T: 157.275 R: 161.875 T: 157.325 R: 161.925 T: 157.375 R: 161.975 T: 161.825 R: 157.225 T: 161.875 R: 157.275 T: 161.925 R: 157.325 T: 161.975 R: 157.375 CHANNEL US INTL CA 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 84 85 86 87 87b T/R:
T/R:
157.375 161.975 T: 157.425 R: 162.025 88 88 87a 88a WX1 WX2 WX3 WX4 WX5 WX6 WX7 T/R:
157.425 88b T/R:
162.025 WX1 WX2 WX3 CHANNEL USAGE US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Automatic Identification System duplex repeater International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. US: Commercial, Intership only. International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial, Intership only. Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. T/R:
157.375 T/R:
161.975 T: 162.025 R: 157.425 T/R:
157.425 T/R:
162.025 R: 162.55 R: 162.4 R: 162.475 R: 162.425 R: 162.45 R: 162.5 R: 162.525 8.2 NARROWBANDING The FCC has mandated that all public safety radios manufactured after January 1, 2013 comply with narrowbanding restrictions (see http://transition.fcc.gov/pshs/public-safetyspectrum/narrowbanding.html for more information). Radios manufactured after the above date will comply with these restrictions. Existing radio personalities that contain frequencies that violate the new FCC rules will cause an invalid channel error indication on the radio display. The user will need to change the radio personality to comply with the new rules. Note that there are multiple exceptions to the narrowbanding mandate, including the Marine Frequencies listed in Section 8.1. 91 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 9. GLOSSARY AES AES-256 AMBE+2 ANSI ASCII C CA CDCSS CH INFO CKR CMB CTCSS DES DES-OFB DFO DMS
-A-
Advanced Encryption Standard Advanced Encryption Standard, 256-bit Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange
-B-
-C-
Celsius Canada Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System Channel Information Common Key References Continuous Marine Broadcast Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System
-D-
Digital Encryption Standard Digital Encryption Standard Output Feedback Department Fisheries Ocean Degrees Minutes Seconds
-E-
EPIRB Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons F FCC FM Fahrenheit Federal Communications Commission Frequency Modulation
-F-
GHz GEOTRANS Geographic Translator GPS Giga (109) Hertz Global Positioning System Hertz Harris Key Loader
-G-
-H-
-I-
Identification Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers International
-J-
Hz HKL ID IEEE INTL 92 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D KEK kHz KID KMF KMS KS KVL
-K-
Key Encryption Key kilo (103) Hertz Key Identification Key Management Facility Key Management System Key Set Key Variable Loader (Motorola KVL Device)
-L-
LAT/LONG DMS LED Li-ION Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds Light Emitting Diode Lithium-ION MHz mm MR ms NAC Ni-MH NOAA OET OTAR P25 POS PRI PTT RF RPM2 RSI RSM RX SA SMA TIA TX Megahertz Millimeter Mobile Radio milli (10-3) seconds
-M-
-N-
Network Access Code Nickel Metal Hydride National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
-O-
Office of Engineering and Technology Over The Air Rekey Project 25 Position Priority (Channel) Push-to-Talk
-P-
-Q-
-R-
Radio Frequency Radio Personality Manager 2 Radio Set Identifier Remote Speaker Microphone Receive Situational Awareness Subminiature version A
-S-
-T-
Telecommunications Industry Association Transmit 93 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D UHF UKEK US USCG UTC UTM VDC VHF VIDA VTS
-U-
Ultra High Frequency Unique Key Encryption Key United States United States Coast Guard Universal Time Coordinated Universal Transverse Mercator
-V-
Volts, Direct Current Very High Frequency Voice Interoperability Data Access Vessel Traffic Service
-W-
WEEE Waste from Electric and Electronic Equipment
-X-
-Y-
-Z-
94 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 10. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING 10.1 ERROR MESSAGES This section provides a list of error messages, as well as possible causes and solutions. Table 10-1: Displayed Error Messages, Reasons, and Resolutions SCREEN/
MENU Top-Level Screen Bluetooth Pairing Screen DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGE INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED PAIRING FAILED REASON RESOLUTION Corrupt key database or incorrect database configuration. Bluetooth pairing failed. Zeroize database. Ensure device is discoverable and attempt to re-pair the device. Channel Edit Screen EDIT FAILED Unable to modify P25 Channel. INVALID RX FREQUENCY Entered Rx frequency is invalid. INVALID TX FREQUENCY Entered Tx frequency is invalid. Error during install process. Install Operations INSTALL FAILED Extraction of compressed file failed. Removal of existing SW failed. Mission plan activation failed. Use RPM2 Power cycle and try again--contact Harris if problem persists. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. Attempt install again and contact Harris if problem persists. to ensure plan validity. Contact Harris if failures persist. Mission Plan In Progress Screen Security Menu Utilities Menu Channel Info Screen ZEROIZE FAILED Radio could not zeroize. NO KEYS TO ZEROIZE INCORRECT PASSWORD Maintenance password Key database empty. invalid. Radio problempower cycle and contact Harris if problem persists. Nothing to zeroize. Enter valid maintenance password. INCORRECT PASSWORD Channel edit password invalid. Enter valid channel edit password. 95 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 10.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION WORKAROUNDS:
1. Zeroize. 2. Load proper KEK from the Harris Key Loader or Motorola KVL. IF RADIO INDICATES:
1. INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED - This occurs if the radios keys were loaded by the Harris Key Loader followed by an attempt to load UKEKs with the Key Loader or keys with the Motorola KVL.
- Fix by performing workaround 1, followed by 2. 2. NO UKEK Displayed during a zeroize performed from the radio or a zeroize initiated from the KMF.
- Fix by performing workaround 2. 3. Zeroize Complete KMF has zeroized the radio.
- Fix by performing workaround 2. 4. Disabled OTAR Icon (red slash) OTAR is disabled while in scan, talkaround, emergency, and monitor.
- Fix by disabling these features. Icon will be corrected (no red slash). 5. Gray OTAR Icon (no red slash) OTAR has not registered with tower (Conventional or Trunked system).
- Fix by verifying proper frequencies.
-
If the radio is turned to the OTAR channel out of range of a conventional tower, and then comes in range after 3 minutes, fix by issuing an OTAR. Rekey, leaving and re-enter the OTAR channel. 6. Green OTAR Icon OTAR is registered, all is well.
-
If update fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 7. Blue OTAR Icon OTAR is attempting to rekey.
-
If rekey fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 96 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D 11. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TAC) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is the point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance and repair provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or contact the Technical Assistance Center directly:
North America:
International:
Fax:
E-mail:
1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 12. WARRANTY Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:
http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product warranty literature. 97 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D APPENDIX A WI-FI PROGRAMMING These instructions assume the user has a basic familiarity with Wi-Fi Networks, their configuration, and how to connect devices. If you are unfamiliar with the terms and/or procedures mentioned in these instructions, please contact your IT department for help before attempting to configure Wi-Fi programming. NOTE A.1 NETWORK CONFIGURATION In order to program the XL-200P over Wi-Fi, you need to have a wireless network available. This wireless network will be used by RPM2 and the radio for Wi-Fi functionality. RPM2 and the XL-
200P come with a default Wi-Fi configuration, but they can be customized to match an existing Wi-Fi configuration. For default operation, setup a wireless network (access point) as follows:
SSID (or networking name) is set to the radio default of harrisradios Password of password Encryption type of either WPA or WPA2 Ensure your wireless router supports mDNS/Multicast In order for XL-200P radios to be discoverable on the Wi-Fi network, your wireless router must be configured to allow mDNS/Multicast. This varies by router manufacturer; refer to your routers documentation for specific settings needed to enable mDNS/Multicast. NOTE A.2 RADIO/RPM CONFIGURATION Ensure that Enable WIFI is enabled (checked) on the RPM 2 Preferences screen as shown in Figure 12-1. This is disabled (unchecked) by default. Figure 12-1: Enable WIFI in RPM 2 For default operation using the network as described in Section A.1, no other configuration of the radio or RPM is required. 98 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D A.3 PC CONFIGURATION Configure the PC to connect to the same Wireless network as the radio. For Windows 7, this can be done through the Network and Sharing Center. A.4 CONNECTION 1. For default operation, power on radio while pressing and holding the bottom side and PTT buttons. This places the radio into Wi-Fi programming mode. A screen appears on the front panel indicating the radio is in Wi-Fi programming mode. Figure 12-2: Enable Wi-Fi on XL-200P 2. Start RPM2. 3. Select the Connection tab (the one with the radio icon) and click the Wi-Fi connection button as shown below. You should see any radios that are in Wi-Fi mode appear. Radios should start to appear in this area once RPM2 and the radio(s) are on the same network. Make sure this button is selected to get into Wi-Fi discovery mode. 99 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D A.5 PERSONAL/CUSTOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 1. In order to use a wireless network with parameters that are different from the default configuration above, some configuration of RPM2 and the radio is required. In RPM2, create a new personality or open a personality previously created for the radio that you wish to program over Wi-Fi. 2. Navigate to the Network Configuration screen as shown in Figure 12-3. The default parameters as noted in Section A.4 should be shown. Figure 12-3: RPM2 Network Configuration Screen 3. Change the parameters as needed to match the configuration of the network you are trying to use for Wi-Fi programming. 4. Reprogram the radio with this personality over USB and activate it. 5. You should now be able to connect to this radio over Wi-Fi following the procedure as outlined in Section A.4. In order to connect over Wi-Fi, the currently active personality MUST have the correct Wi-Fi parameters. Therefore, care must be taken that all personalities on a given radio have the correct Wi-Fi parameters for the desired network. Otherwise, activation of another personality on the radio will result in the inability to establish a Wi-Fi connection. NOTE 100 14221-1800-2000, Rev. D This page intentionally left blank. 101 Public Safety and Professional Communications | www.pspc.harris.com 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway | Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 | 1-800-528-7711 Product Safety Manual 14221-1800-2010 Rev. B, Feb/16 rate This booklet contains important safety information regarding specific absorption
(SAR) and RF exposure limits included in United States and international standards. Read the information in this booklet before operating your radio. XL-200P Series Portable Radios REV DATE
- Aug/15 A Nov/15 Added CE information. Initial release. DESCRIPTION B Feb/16 Updated DoC and added EU regulatory approval info and EU RF exposure info. Updated Table 1-1 and Tableau 2-1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The software contained in this device is copyrighted by Harris Corporation. Unpublished rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. This device is made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482;
5,185,796; 5,271,017; 5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460;
5,502,767; 5,146,497; 5,164,986; 5,185,795; 5,226,084;
5,247,579; 5,491,772; 5,517,511; 5,630,011; 5,649,050;
5,701,390; 5,715,365; 5,754,974; 5,826,222; 5,870,405;
6,161,089; and 6,199,037 B1. DVSI claims certain rights, including patent rights under aforementioned U.S. patents, and under other U.S. and foreign patents and patents pending. Any use of this software or technology requires a separate written license from DVSI. CREDITS are and registered assuredcommunications Harris trademarks of Harris Corporation. RBRC and 1-800-8-BATTERY are registered trademarks of Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation. All other product and brand names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. NOTICE The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99;
in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PSPC Division, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. This product should be taken to a recycling center at the end of its life. 2 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B The voice coding technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into human-readable form. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations, or substitution of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturers warranty. This manual is published by Harris Corporation, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation, at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2016 Harris Corporation. improvements 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 3 This device is a RF transceiver intended for land mobile radio applications. The device may have use restrictions, which require that the national authority be contacted for any system licensing requirements, frequency use, allowable power level, etc. 4 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B esky
[Czech]
Dansk
[Danish]
Deutsch
[German]
Eesti
[Estonian]
English Espaol
[Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais
[French]
mit der brigen Harris Corporation tmto prohlauje, e tento XL-200P je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede Harris Corporation erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr XL-200P overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Harris Corporation, in dass sich das Gert XL-200P bereinstimmung den grundlegenden Anforderungen und einschlgigen den Bestimmungen Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Harris Corporation seadme XL-200P vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, Harris Corporation, declares that this XL-200P is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente Harris Corporation declara que el XL-200P cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Harris Corporation XL-200P 1999/5/. Par la prsente Harris Corporation dclare que l'appareil XL-200P est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 5 Italiano
[Italian]
Latviski
[Latvian]
Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Malti
[Maltese]
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Polski
[Polish]
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Slovensky
[Slovak]
toestel XL-200P Con la presente Harris Corporation dichiara che questo XL-200P conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Harris Corporation deklar, XG 25P UHF-L(378-470 MHz), 7/800
(764-870MHz) atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo Harris Corporation deklaruoja, kad is XL-200P atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart Harris Corporation dat het in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Hawnhekk, Harris Corporation, jiddikjara li dan XL-200P jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a XL-200P megfelel a alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym Harris Corporation owiadcza, e XL-200P jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Harris Corporation declara que este XL-200P est conforme com os requisitos outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Harris Corporation izjavlja, da je ta XL-
200P v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Harris Corporation tmto vyhlasuje, e XL-200P spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. essenciais vonatkoz Harris e 6 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B Suomi
[Finnish]
Svenska
[Swedish]
slenska
[Icelandic]
Norsk
[Norwegian]
str XL-200P Harris Corporation vakuuttaa tten ett XL-200P tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar Harris Corporation att denna I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Hr me lsir Harris Corporation yfir v a XL-200P er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Harris Corporation erklrer herved at utstyret XL-200P er i samsvar med de grunnleggende vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. krav og 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1. REGULATORY & SAFETY INFORMATION .. 9 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS............ 9 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION ....... 10 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS .................... 13 1.4 OPERATING TIPS ....................................... 13 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT ............. 17 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT .............................................. 17 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT ............. 18 2.3 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ................................. 21 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ...................... 22 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES ....................... 26 4. BATTERY PACKS .............................................. 27 4.1 CONDITIONING LITHIUM-ION BATTERY PACKS ....................................... 28 4.2 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS ........ 28 4.3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION .................. 28 4.4 BATTERY DISPOSAL ................................. 28 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .............................. 30 6. WARRANTY ....................................................... 31 Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:
Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 Or Fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 Or E-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com 8 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 1. REGULATORY & SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY SYMBOL CONVENTIONS Failure The following conventions are used to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these standards. to comply with symbol like, which, The WARNING calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. like, which, The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in a risk of danger, damage the equipment, or severely degrade the equipment performance. to The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. WARNING CAUTION NOTE 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 9 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION for and The Harris XL-200P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is the NOT General Population an uncontrolled environment. for use by in intended WARNING the following Standards The XL-200P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this radio complies with and to RF energy and Guidelines with electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:
FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields. regard American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. of American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102. frequency Exposure Compliance of Radio communication Apparatus (All Frequency Bands). European Council Directive 89/391/EEC. Radio 10 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines that exposure To ensure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the EU/AU/FCC/IC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:
CAUTION DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-
Talk) button. requirements ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories
(antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 5 cm (2 inches) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Refer to Standard EN 62311:2008. 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 11 Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Tested Distances1 RADIO FREQUENCY BAND VHF
(136 - 174 MHz) UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) TESTED DISTANCES
(worst case scenario) Body2 0.47 in
(1.2 cm) 0.47 in
(1.2 cm) Face 0.98 in
(2.5 cm) 0.98 in
(2.5 cm) 0.47 in
(1.2 cm) 0.98 in
(2.5 cm) 5 GHz 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) 0.47 in
(1.2 cm) 0.47 in
(1.2 cm) 0.98 in
(2.5 cm) 0.98 in
(2.5 cm) The the information needed to make the user aware of a RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits.
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) in information this section provides 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility During transmissions, Harris radios generate RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radios in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. to electromagnetic 1 Minimum safe operating distances for the radio are based on the Harmonized Standards and SAR evaluation. 2 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 12 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS 1.3.1 Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Industry Canada OPERATING TIPS 1.3.2 This device complies with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1.4 Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the batteries. 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 13 WARNING 1.4.1.1 WARNING WARNING Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on. Antenna Care and Replacement Always keep the antenna at least 0..47 inches (1.2 cm) away from the body and 0.98 inches (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure FCC RF compliance requirements are not exceeded. exposure Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if skin comes into contact with a damaged antenna. Replace antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, violate FCC regulations. and may damaged a Unauthorized Use only the supplied or approved antenna. antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. CAUTION 14 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 1.4.1.2 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc., are shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!
CAUTION 1.4.1.3 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!
Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!
WARNING 1.4.1.4 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the
"Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used. (OSHA Standard:
1926.900) WARNING 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fuelling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn OFF two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible its that a radio or accessories could generate sparks. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in potentially explosive atmosphere areas. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. 1.4.1.5 WARNING WARNING 16 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-
respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-respect de ces normes par le client. sur une identifies lattention Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les soient conditions compltement ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une baisse de rendement de lquipement. comprises importante MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 17 REMARQUE Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. qui 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT de des une produit La radio portative Harris XL-
lnergie 200P lectromagntique RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. utilisation par par des MISE EN GARDE La radio portative XL-200P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :
Bulletin 65 du OET de la FCC, dition 97-01, supplment C, portant sur lvaluation de la conformit aux directives de la FCC quant lexposition champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences. humaine aux 18 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. lIEEE sur American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. champs des 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :
la FCC pour AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT (bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 19 de la pile, une lexposition aux RF. faible puissance rduit Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-
parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.
(Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm (0,47 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm (0,98 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. votre de Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF RADIOFRQUENCES
(136 - 174 MHz) VHF UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) DISTANCES TESTES
(pire des scnarios) Visage 2,5 cm Corps3 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 3 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 20 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B RADIOFRQUENCES 5 GHz
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) DISTANCES TESTES
(pire des scnarios) Visage 2,5 cm Corps3 1,2 cm pour Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. lutilisateur sensibiliser 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 le faire. Nutilisez PAS indiqu de INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :
1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. Industrie Canada 2.3.2 Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil 21 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B si CONSEILS DUTILISATION doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. lextrieur peut fixe faciliter 2.4.1 Utilisation Efficace de la Radio Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume!
MISE EN GARDE 22 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 2.4.1.1 Entretien et Remplacement de lantenne Conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne au moins 1,5 cm (0,59 po) du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm (1,0 po) du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. exigences les peau. Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec Remplacez la immdiatement une antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la radio et pourrait enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. portative alors MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE non Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. autorises, AVERTISSEMENT 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 23 2.4.1.2 Appareils lectroniques affecter lquipement les voitures, Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lectronique moderne dans les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-
le!
AVERTISSEMENT 2.4.1.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio avant portative dembarquer bord dun avion!
Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol!
MISE EN GARDE 24 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 2.4.1.4 Dtonateurs lectriques des 305 m la dtonation Pour prvenir accidentelle dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de des dtonation. oprations Respectez les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. OSHA :
1926.900)
(1 000 pi) de toujours
(Norme MISE EN GARDE 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 25 2.4.1.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive en chimiques clairement Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les lair contient des zones dont produits ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio accessoires produisent des tincelles. une ses les ou MISE EN GARDE 3. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES A complete list of Options and Accessories approved for use with the XL-200P portable radio can be found online in the Operators Manual 14221-1800-2000 at www.pspc.harris.com. Also reference the Products and Services Catalog for all available options and accessories, that do not adversely affect the RF energy exposure. including items those 26 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B use Harris Always authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. RF
(battery, Always use the correct options and accessories antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. See 14221-1800-2000, Operator Manual available at http://pspc.harris.com/Products/Portable/
XL200P.aspx, for the list of accessories. online WARNING CAUTION 4. BATTERY PACKS The XL-200P series portable radios use rechargeable, recyclable Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) battery packs. Please follow the directions below to maximize the useful life of each type of battery pack. safety Do not disassemble or modify Lithium battery packs. The Lithium battery packs are equipped with built-in protection features. Should these features be disabled or tampered with in any way, the battery pack can leak electrolyte, overheat, emit smoke, burst, and/or ignite. and If the battery pack is ruptured or is leaking electrolyte that results in skin or eye contact with the electrolyte, immediately flush the affected area with water. If the battery electrolyte gets in the eyes, flush with water for 15 minutes and consult a physician immediately. WARNING WARNING 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 27 Always use Harris authorized chargers and conditioners. Use of unauthorized chargers and conditioners may void the warranty. CONDITIONING LITHIUM-ION BATTERY PACKS CAUTION 4.1 Li-Ion battery packs do not suffer from memory effect and therefore do not require conditioning. 4.2 STORING LI-ION BATTERY PACKS If a battery pack is expected to be idle for a month or more, it should be properly prepared. Li-Ion battery packs should not be stored fully charged. Before storing the battery pack, discharge it to 40% capacity. If the battery is not discharged prior to storage, its overall capacity may be reduced. Although all battery packs experience some capacity loss during storage, the shelf life for Li-Ion battery packs is about 3 months. However, note that any capacity drop which occurs during storage is permanent and cannot be reversed. Li-Ion battery packs should be purchased and used immediately. They should not be stock-piled without a rotating stock plan. 4.3 For more information regarding the proper care of portable radio battery packs or establishing a battery maintenance program, refer to ECR-7367 which may be ordered by calling toll free 1-800-368-3277
(international via https://premier.pspc.harris.com/infocenter/. 4.4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BATTERY DISPOSAL 1-434-455-6403) or
-
In no instance should a battery pack be incinerated. Disposing of a battery pack by burning will cause an explosion. 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B CAUTION 28 into RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACK DISPOSAL The product you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery pack. The battery pack is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery pack the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal. Canadian and U.S. users may call Toll Free 1-
800-8-BATTERY for information and/or procedures for returning rechargeable batteries in your locality. 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 29 5. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TACs) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is your point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance, and repair, provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or call the Technical Assistance Center directly at:
North America:
International:
Fax:
E-mail:
1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 30 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 6. WARRANTY 1-800-368-3277 1-321-409-4393 If any part of the system equipment is damaged on arrival, contact the shipper to conduct an inspection and prepare a damage report. Save the shipping container and all packing materials until the inspection and the damage report are completed. In addition, contact the Customer Care center to make arrangements for replacement equipment. Do not return any part of the shipment until you receive detailed instructions from a Harris representative. North America:
Phone Number:
Fax Number:
E-mail: PSPC_CustomerFocus@harris.com International:
Phone Number:
Fax Number:
E-mail:
PSPC_InternationalCustomerFocus@harris.com Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage, and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:
http://www.pspc.harris.com/Service/Customerservice
.aspx. While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product warranty literature. 1-434-455-6403 1-321-409-4394 14221-1800-2010, Rev. B 31 Harris Corporation 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway
| Lynchburg, VA USA 24501 www.pspc.harris.com | 1-800-528-7711
various | Users Manual Rev N | Users Manual | 1.87 MiB | September 06 2019 / March 04 2020 | delayed release |
14221-1800-2000 Rev. M, August 2019 XL-200P Full-Spectrum Multiband XL-185P Single Band Portable Radios 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M REV.
A B C D E F G H J K L M DATE Sep/15 Sep/15 Nov/15 Jan/16 Jul/16 Jan/17 Apr/17 Nov/17 Jan/18 Apr/18 Jan/19 Mar/19 Aug/19 MANUAL REVISION HISTORY REASON FOR CHANGE Initial release. Added Section 3. Added CE information. Updated Declaration of Conformity. Added EU regulatory approval information (standards) and EU RF exposure information. Updated Table 1-1 and Tableau 2-1. Updated for XLP R2A. Added note to Section 4.3.1 regarding charging the battery before first use. Updated Appendix A. Updated Section 4.3.3. Updated Sections 1.2, 4.1, 4.6, 5.9, 5.13, 10, included XLP R3A features, and added Sections 4.3.4, 5.37, and 5.7. Updated to add XLP R4A features. Added XL-185P, XLP R5A features, and C1D1 information, updated Table 4-1. Updated Sections 6.4, 7.2, and Table 5-1. Updated for XLP R6A and updated Section 4.3.4. Updated for XLP R7, updated Table 4-1, and updated Section 3.1. Added Section 6.10.3. Updated Section 6.10.3 and Table 4-1. Added Section 6.10.4. Updated for XLP R9A release. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT This product was developed using GEOTRANS, a product of the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency and U.S. Army Engineering Research and Development Center. Use of this software does not indicate endorsement or approval of the product by the Secretary of Defense or the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency. This device made under license under one or more of the following US patents: 4,590,473; 4,636,791; 5,148,482; 5,185,796; 5,271,017;
5,377,229; 4,716,407; 4,972,460; 5,502,767; 5,146,697; 5,164,986; 5,185,795. The Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 (AMBE+2) voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-
readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974, #5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011, #5,581,656,
#5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579, #5,226,084 and #5,195,166. Harris, Unity, VIDA, EDACS, NetworkFirst, and OpenSky are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation. TECHNOLOGY TO CONNECT, INFORM AND PROTECT is a trademark of Harris Corporation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. AMBE is a registered trademark and IMBE, AMBE+, and AMBE+2 are trademarks of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective holders. CREDITS NOTICE!
The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government. Rated: EAR99; in accordance with U.S. Dept. of Commerce regulations 15CFR774, Export Administration Regulations. Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, PSPC Business, 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway, Lynchburg, VA 24501. Repairs to this equipment should be made only by an authorized service technician or facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs, alterations or substitutions of recommended parts made by the user to this equipment not approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment in addition to the manufacturer's warranty. This product conforms to the European Union WEEE Directive 2012/19/EU. Do not dispose of this product in a public landfill. Take it to a recycling center at the end of its life. Harris products comply with the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS) Directive. This manual is published by Harris Corporation without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Harris Corporation at any time and without notice. Such changes will be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Harris Corporation. Copyright 2015-2019 Harris Corporation. 2 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2.3 1.3 2.1 2.2 1.1 1.2 Section 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................ 8 SAFETY CONVENTIONS ......................................................................................................... 8 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 8 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines .................................................................................................. 9 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility ................................................................. 10 REGULATORY APPROVALS ................................................................................................. 10 1.3.1 Part 15 ........................................................................................................................... 10 1.3.2 Industry Canada ............................................................................................................. 10 1.4 OPERATING TIPS .................................................................................................................... 10 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation ............................................................................................. 11 1.4.2 Antenna Care and Replacement .................................................................................... 11 1.4.3 Electronic Devices ......................................................................................................... 11 1.4.4 Aircraft .......................................................................................................................... 11 1.4.5 Electric Blasting Caps ................................................................................................... 11 1.4.6 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres ............................................................................... 12 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT ....................................... 13 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT ...................................................... 13 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT ..................................... 13 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF ................................................................................ 14 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique ............................................................. 15 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES ....................................................................... 15 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC ....................................................................................................... 15 2.3.2 Industrie Canada ............................................................................................................ 15 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION ................................................................................................... 15 2.5 UTILISATION EFFICACE DE LA RADIO ............................................................................. 15 2.5.1 Entretien Et Remplacement De Lantenne .................................................................... 16 2.5.2 Appareils lectroniques ................................................................................................ 16 2.5.3 Avion ............................................................................................................................. 16 2.5.4 Dtonateurs lectriques ................................................................................................. 16 2.5.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive ........................................................................ 17 3. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ............................................................................................................. 18 CLASS 1, DIVISION 2 OPTION .............................................................................................. 18 3.1 CLASS 1, DIVISION 1 OPTION .............................................................................................. 19 3.2 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 22 4.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 22 STORAGE GUIDELINES ......................................................................................................... 23 4.2 4.3 BASIC SETUP ........................................................................................................................... 23 4.3.1 Assemble the Radio ....................................................................................................... 23 4.3.2 Removing the Battery .................................................................................................... 24 4.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip or D-Post .................................................................. 24 4.3.4 Install the SIM Card ...................................................................................................... 25 4.4 UNIVERSAL DEVICE CONNECTOR .................................................................................... 26 4.5 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................... 26 4.6 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................. 27 4.7 RELATED PUBLICATIONS .................................................................................................... 30 5. BASIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 31 RADIO CONTROLS ................................................................................................................. 31 5.1 4. 3 Page 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.6 Section SOFT DTMF KEYPAD ............................................................................................................. 33 5.2 BEFORE FIRST USE ................................................................................................................ 33 5.3 5.4 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME ........................................................................................... 34 5.5 VIDA ID ..................................................................................................................................... 34 5.5.1 User Login ..................................................................................................................... 34 5.5.2 Provisioning .................................................................................................................. 34 RADIO DISPLAYS ................................................................................................................... 35 5.6.1 Top Display ................................................................................................................... 35 5.6.2 Front Display ................................................................................................................. 35 5.7 MANDOWN .............................................................................................................................. 37 STATUS MESSSAGES ............................................................................................................. 37 5.8 5.9 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS ........................................................................................... 38 5.10 MENU ........................................................................................................................................ 39 5.11 ALERT TONES ......................................................................................................................... 42 5.12 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 43 5.13 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK ............................................................................. 44 5.14 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD ...................................................................................................... 45 5.15 GROUP CALLS ......................................................................................................................... 45 5.15.1 Transmit a Group Call ................................................................................................... 45 5.15.2 Receive a Group Call .................................................................................................... 46 INDIVIDUAL CALLS ............................................................................................................... 47 5.16.1 Transmit an Individual Call ........................................................................................... 47 5.16.2 Receiving an Individual Call ......................................................................................... 47 5.17 USER PROFILES ...................................................................................................................... 48 5.18 NOISE CANCELLATION ........................................................................................................ 49 5.18.1 Enable Noise Cancellation ............................................................................................ 49 5.18.2 Using Noise Cancellation .............................................................................................. 50 5.18.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone ................................................................ 50 5.18.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone ......................................................................... 50 5.18.5 When using an SCBA Mask .......................................................................................... 50 5.19 PTT OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 51 5.20 VOICE ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................................ 51 5.21 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................ 52 5.22 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE ............................................................................................. 52 5.23 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ................................................. 53 5.24 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL 5.16 ONLY) ....................................................................................................................................... 54 5.25 TYPE 99 OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 56 5.25.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 ................................................................................................ 56 5.25.2 Disable After PTT ......................................................................................................... 56 5.25.3 Auto Reset ..................................................................................................................... 56 5.26 CALL ALERT (PAGE) .............................................................................................................. 57 5.26.1 Send Alert ...................................................................................................................... 57 5.26.2 Receive Alert ................................................................................................................. 57 5.27 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT ............................................................................................. 57 5.28 DTMF ......................................................................................................................................... 58 5.29 AUDIO PLAYBACK ................................................................................................................. 58 5.30 START SCAN ............................................................................................................................ 59 4 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Section Page TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.31 STOP SCAN .............................................................................................................................. 60 5.32 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ........................................ 61 5.33 NUISANCE DELETE ................................................................................................................ 62 5.34 FAILSOFT ................................................................................................................................. 63 5.34.1 Conventional Failsoft (EDACS Only) .......................................................................... 63 5.34.2 Failsoft (P25 Trunked) .................................................................................................. 63 5.35 EMERGENCY OPERATION ................................................................................................... 64 5.35.1 Declaring an Emergency Call ........................................................................................ 64 5.35.2 Receiving an Emergency Call ....................................................................................... 64 5.35.3 Stealth Emergency ......................................................................................................... 65 5.36 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY)................................................................. 65 5.36.1 Normal PTT Operation .................................................................................................. 65 5.36.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling ................................................................................... 65 5.36.3 Emergency Declaration ................................................................................................. 65 5.37 BEON OPERATION ................................................................................................................. 66 5.37.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 66 5.37.2 Wi-Fi Client Selection ................................................................................................... 66 5.38 STEALTH MODE ..................................................................................................................... 67 6. ADVANCED OPERATIONS .............................................................................................................. 68 6.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES ........................................................................................ 68 6.1.1 View Personalities ......................................................................................................... 68 6.1.2 Change Active Personality ............................................................................................ 69 6.2 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY................................. 70 6.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS ...................................................................................... 71 6.3.1 Command Tactical Zone ............................................................................................... 71 6.3.2 Mixed System Zone ...................................................................................................... 72 6.4 CH INFO MENU ....................................................................................................................... 73 6.5 AUDIO SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 73 6.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS ............................................................................................................... 74 6.7 GPS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 75 6.8 POSITION INFO ....................................................................................................................... 75 6.9 WI-FI .......................................................................................................................................... 76 6.10 BLUETOOTH ............................................................................................................................ 77 6.10.1 Enable Bluetooth ........................................................................................................... 77 6.10.2 Pair Devices ................................................................................................................... 78 6.10.3 Reconnecting to Covert Bluetooth Microphone 12082-0684-01 .................................. 79 6.10.4 Pair with the SCOTT EPIC 3 Radio Direct Interface (RDI) Voice Amplifier .............. 79 6.11 CLOCK SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 80 6.12 BATTERY INFO ....................................................................................................................... 80 6.13 SELECT LANGUAGE .............................................................................................................. 81 6.14 SET UP SCAN ........................................................................................................................... 81 6.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels .................................................................. 82 6.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning ................................................................................... 82 6.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) .......................................................... 83 6.14.4 Edit Scan List ................................................................................................................ 83 6.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels ........................................................ 84 6.14.6 Custom Scan Lists ......................................................................................................... 85 6.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked and EDACS) ................................................... 86 5 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Page Section TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.14.8 Site Lock ....................................................................................................................... 87 6.15 RADIO STATUS ....................................................................................................................... 88 6.16 RADIO MESSAGE .................................................................................................................... 89 6.17 RADIO TEXTLINK ................................................................................................................... 90 6.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages ............................................................................................. 90 6.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms .................................................................................................. 90 6.17.3 View Received Messages .............................................................................................. 91 6.18 FAULTS/ALERTS ..................................................................................................................... 92 6.19 TONE ENCODE ........................................................................................................................ 93 6.20 ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................................................... 93 6.20.1 Create and Load Keys ................................................................................................... 93 6.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio .............................................................................................. 94 6.20.3 Protected Keys ............................................................................................................... 94 6.20.4 Global Encryption ......................................................................................................... 94 6.20.5 Select Keyset ................................................................................................................. 95 6.20.6 View Key List ............................................................................................................... 96 6.20.7 Delete Individual Keys .................................................................................................. 96 6.20.8 OTAR Configuration ..................................................................................................... 97 6.21 P25 CONVENTIONAL FALLBACK ....................................................................................... 97 7. PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................................ 98 7.1 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 .................................................................................................. 98 7.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) ..................................... 98 7.3 OTAP ....................................................................................................................................... 100 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES .............................................................. 101 7.4 7.4.1 Programmable Buttons ................................................................................................ 101 7.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch ............................................................................... 102 7.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch .................................................................................. 103 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS ................................................................................................... 104 7.5.1 Top Display ................................................................................................................. 104 7.5.2 Front Display ............................................................................................................... 105 8. REFERENCE ..................................................................................................................................... 106 8.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES ...................................................................................................... 106 8.2 NARROWBANDING .............................................................................................................. 111 9. GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................................ 112 10. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................................ 115 10.1 ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................................... 115 10.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION .......................................................................................... 117 11. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ............................................................................................................ 118 12. WARRANTY ...................................................................................................................................... 118 APPENDIX A WI-FI PROGRAMMING ......................................................................................... 119 7.5 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 4-1: Radio Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 23 Figure 4-2: Remove the Battery .................................................................................................................... 24 Figure 4-3: Remove Belt Clip ........................................................................................................................ 24 Page 6 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Section Figure 4-4: SIM Card Installation.................................................................................................................. 25 Figure 4-5: Universal Device Connector ....................................................................................................... 26 Figure 5-1: Radio Controls ............................................................................................................................ 31 Figure 5-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad .................................................................................................... 33 Figure 5-3: Top Display ................................................................................................................................ 35 Figure 5-4: Sample Idle Front Display .......................................................................................................... 35 Figure 5-5: Using Noise Cancellation ........................................................................................................... 50 Figure 6-1: Enabling Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................... 76 Figure 6-2: Wi-Fi Install Active .................................................................................................................... 77 Figure A-1: Options Network Configuration .......................................................................................... 120 Figure A-2: Wi-Fi Configuration ................................................................................................................. 120 Figure A-3: Service Name ........................................................................................................................... 120 Figure A-4: Enable Wi-Fi in RPM2 ............................................................................................................ 121 Figure A-5: Enable Wi-Fi Programming Mode on Radio ........................................................................... 122 LIST OF TABLES Page Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Tested Distances (Worst Case Scenario) ............................................. 9 Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF (pire des scnarios) ......................... 14 Table 4-1: Options and Accessories .............................................................................................................. 27 Table 5-1: Radio Controls, Indicators, and Connectors ................................................................................. 31 Table 5-2: Radio Icons .................................................................................................................................. 36 Table 5-3: Status Messages ........................................................................................................................... 37 Table 5-4: Predefined Menu Layouts ............................................................................................................ 38 Table 5-5: Menu Navigation ......................................................................................................................... 40 Table 5-6: Alert Tones ................................................................................................................................... 42 Table 7-1: Valid Frequency Ranges ............................................................................................................ 100 Table 7-2: Programmable Button Options ................................................................................................... 101 Table 7-3: Programmable /O Switch Options ........................................................................................... 102 Table 7-4: Single-Instance Features ............................................................................................................ 103 Table 7-5: Indexed Features ........................................................................................................................ 104 Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies .................................................................................................................... 106 Table 10-1: Displayed Error Messages, Reasons, and Resolutions ............................................................ 115 Table A-1: Wi-Fi Feature Support ............................................................................................................... 123 Harris Corporation, Public Safety and Professional Communications (PSPC) Business continually evaluates its technical publications for completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by submitting your comments and suggestions to the following:
Harris Corporation PSPC Business Technical Publications 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 fax your comments to: 1-434-455-6851 or e-mail us at: PSPC_TechPubs@harris.com 7 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 1. REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION 1.1 SAFETY CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used throughout this manual to alert the user to general safety precautions that must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warning elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Harris assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these standards. The WARNING symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING symbol until the conditions identified are fully understood or met. The CAUTION symbol calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not performed correctly or adhered to, could result in damage to the equipment or severely degrade the equipment performance. The NOTE symbol calls attention to supplemental information, which may improve system performance or clarify a process or procedure. 1.2 SAFETY TRAINING INFORMATION The Harris XL-200P/XL-185P portable radio generates RF electromagnetic energy during transmit mode. This radio is designed for and classified as Occupational Use Only, meaning it must be used only during the course of employment by individuals aware of the hazards and the ways to minimize such hazards. This radio is NOT intended for use by the General Population in an uncontrolled environment. The XL-200P/XL-185P portable radio has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. In addition, this Harris radio complies with the following Standards and Guidelines regarding RF energy and electromagnetic energy levels and evaluation of such levels for exposure to humans:
FCC KDB Publication 447498 General RF Exposure Guidance American National Standards Institute (C95.1 19921), IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields RF and Microwave. IC Standard RSS-102. Radiofrequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus (All Frequency Bands). European Council Directive 89/391/EEC. 1 Tested to ANSI C95.1-1992 in compliance with 47 CFR 2.1093. Meets or exceeds safety requirements of ANSI C95.1-
2005. 8 WARNING CAUTION NOTE WARNING 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 1.2.1 RF Exposure Guidelines To ensure that exposure to RF electromagnetic energy is within the EU/AU/FCC/IC allowable limits for occupational use, always adhere to the following guidelines:
DO NOT operate the radio without a proper antenna attached, as this may damage the radio and may also cause the FCC RF exposure limits to be exceeded. A proper antenna is the antenna supplied with this radio by Harris or an antenna specifically authorized by Harris for use with this radio. (Refer to Table 4-1.) DO NOT transmit for more than 50% of total radio use time (50% duty cycle). Transmitting more than 50% of the time can cause FCC RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. The radio is transmitting when the TX indicator appears in the display. The radio will transmit by pressing the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button. ALWAYS transmit using low power when possible. In addition to conserving battery charge, low power can reduce RF exposure. ALWAYS use Harris authorized accessories (antennas, batteries, belt clips, speaker/mics, etc.). Use of unauthorized accessories may cause the FCC Occupational/Controlled Exposure RF compliance requirements to be exceeded. (Refer to Table 1-1.) As noted in Table 1-1, ALWAYS keep the housing of the transmitter AT LEAST 0.47 inches (1.2 cm) from the body and at least 0.98 in (2.5 cm) from the face when transmitting to ensure EU/AU/FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements are not exceeded. However, to provide the best sound quality to the recipients of your transmission, Harris recommends you hold the microphone at least 2 in (5 cm) from mouth, and slightly off to one side. Refer to Standard EN 62311:2008. Table 1-1: RF Exposure Compliance Tested Distances (Worst Case Scenario) RADIO FREQUENCY Body2 Face
(136 - 174 MHz) VHF UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) 900 MHz
(935-944 MHz)
(896-902 MHz) 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 0.47 in (1.2 cm) 0.98 in (2.5 cm) 2 This is worst case based on the thinnest body mount accessory (belt clip). 9 CAUTION 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M SAR Evaluation: 1g averaged, 50% PTT Duty Factor, Occupational/Controlled Exposure. This device contains multiple transmitters that may operate simultaneously, see Error! Reference source n ot found. Simultaneous Transmission Scenarios for the capable transmit configurations. LTE is not supported by XL Series portables with the C1D1 option. The information in this section provides the information needed to make the user aware of RF exposure, and what to do to assure that this radio operates within the FCC RF exposure limits. 1.2.2 Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility During transmissions, this Harris radio generates RF energy that can possibly cause interference with other devices or systems. To avoid such interference, turn off the radio in areas where signs are posted to do so. DO NOT operate the transmitter in areas that are sensitive to electromagnetic radiation such as hospitals, aircraft, and blasting sites. 1.3 REGULATORY APPROVALS Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 1.3.1 Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1.3.2 Industry Canada 1.4 OPERATING TIPS This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Antenna location and condition are important when operating a portable radio. Operating the radio in low-
lying areas or terrain, under power lines or bridges, inside of a vehicle, or in a metal framed building can severely reduce the range of the unit. Mountains can also reduce the range of the unit. In areas where transmission or reception is poor, some improvement may be obtained by ensuring that the antenna is vertical. Moving a few yards in another direction or moving to a higher elevation may also improve communications. Vehicular operation can be aided with the use of an externally mounted antenna. Battery condition is another important factor in the trouble-free operation of a portable radio. Always properly charge the battery. 10 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 1.4.1 Efficient Radio Operation Keep the antenna in a vertical position when receiving or transmitting a message. Do NOT hold onto the antenna when the radio is powered on!
1.4.2 Antenna Care and Replacement Do not use the portable radio with a damaged or missing antenna. A minor burn may result if a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin. Replace a damaged antenna immediately. Operating a portable radio with the antenna missing could cause personal injury, damage the radio, and may violate FCC regulations. Use only the supplied or approved antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could cause damage to the radio unit and may violate FCC regulations. (Refer to Table 4-1.) 1.4.3 Electronic Devices RF energy from portable radios may affect some electronic equipment. Most modern electronic equipment in cars, hospitals, homes, etc. is shielded from RF energy. However, in areas in which you are instructed to turn off two-way radio equipment, always observe the rules. If in doubt, turn it off!
1.4.4 Aircraft Always turn off a portable radio before boarding any aircraft!
Use it on the ground only with crew permission. DO NOT use while in-flight!!
1.4.5 Electric Blasting Caps To prevent accidental detonation of electric blasting caps, DO NOT use two-way radios within 1000 feet of blasting operations. Always obey the "Turn Off Two-Way Radios" signs posted where electric blasting caps are being used (OSHA Standard:
1926.900). 11 WARNING WARNING CAUTION CAUTION WARNING WARNING 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 1.4.6 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. These may be fueling areas, such as gas stations, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Turn off two-way radios when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. It is rare, but not impossible that a radio or its accessories could generate sparks. 12 WARNING 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 2. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA RGLEMENTATION ET SCURIT 2.1 CONVENTIONS SUR LES SYMBOLES DE SCURIT Les conventions suivantes sont utilises dans le prsent manuel pour avertir lutilisateur des prcautions gnrales de scurit qui doivent tre observes pendant toutes les phases dopration, dentretien et de rparation de ce produit. Le non-respect de ces prcautions ou davertissements prciss ailleurs enfreint les normes de scurit de la conception, de la fabrication et de lutilisation prvue du produit. Harris nassume aucune responsabilit pour le non-
respect de ces normes par le client. Le symbole MISE EN GARDE attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner une blessure personnelle. Ne pas poursuivre au-del dun symbole de MISE EN GARDE avant que les conditions identifies soient compltement comprises ou satisfaites. Le symbole AVERTISSEMENT attire lattention sur une procdure ou une pratique oprationnelle qui, si elle nest pas correctement effectue ou observe, pourrait entraner un bris dquipement ou une importante baisse de rendement de lquipement. Le symbole REMARQUE attire lattention sur des renseignements supplmentaires qui peuvent amliorer le rendement du systme ou clarifier un processus ou une procdure. 2.2 RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LA FORMATION SUR LA SCURIT radio portative Harris XL-200P/XL-185P La lnergie lectromagntique des RF lorsquen mode de transmission. Cette radio est conue et classe pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement , ce qui signifie quelle ne doit tre utilise que dans le cadre dun emploi par des individus conscients des risques et des moyens de limiter ceux-ci. Cette radio NEST PAS conue pour une utilisation par la Population gnrale dans un environnement non contrl. produit de La radio portative XL-200P/XL-185P a t teste et est conforme aux limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC pour une Utilisation professionnelle seulement . De plus, cette radio Harris est conforme aux normes et directives suivantes quant lnergie des RF et aux niveaux dnergie lectromagntique, ainsi qu lvaluation de ces niveaux pour lexposition aux humains :
FCC KDB 447498 American National Standards Institute (C95.1 1992), norme de lIEEE sur les niveaux scuritaires dexposition humaine aux champs lectromagntiques des radiofrquences, 3 kHz 300 GHz. American National Standards Institute (C95.3 1992), pratique recommande par lIEEE pour la mesure des champs lectromagntiques potentiellement dangereux RF et micro-ondes. 13 MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT REMARQUE MISE EN GARDE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 2.2.1 Directives sur lexposition aux RF Pour sassurer que lexposition lnergie lectromagntique des RF se situe dans les limites acceptables de la FCC pour lutilisation professionnelle, respectez toujours les directives suivantes :
Nutilisez PAS la radio sans quune antenne approprie y soit connecte, car ceci peut endommager la radio et galement causer un dpassement des limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. Une antenne approprie est celle fournie par Harris avec cette radio, ou une antenne spcifiquement autorise par Harris pour tre utilise avec cette radio. (Reportez-vous Tableau 2-1.) Ne transmettez PAS pendant plus de 50 % de la dure dutilisation totale de la radio ( cycle de service de 50 % ). La transmission pendant plus de 50 % du temps peut causer un dpassement des exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. La radio transmet lorsque lindicateur TX apparat sur laffichage. La radio transmet lorsquon appuie sur le bouton PTT (bouton de microphone). Transmettez TOUJOURS en basse puissance lorsque possible. En plus de prserver la charge de la pile, une faible puissance rduit lexposition aux RF. Utilisez TOUJOURS des accessoires autoriss Harris (antennes, piles, pinces de ceinture, haut-
parleurs/micros, etc.). Lutilisation daccessoires non autoriss peut entraner un dpassement des exigences de conformit pour une exposition aux RF professionnelle ou contrle de la FCC.
(Reportez-vous Table 4-1.) Tel quindiqu dans Tableau 2-1, conservez TOUJOURS lappareil et son antenne AU MOINS 1,2 cm du corps, et au moins 2,5 cm du visage pendant la transmission, pour vous assurer de ne pas dpasser les exigences de conformit de la FCC en matire dexposition aux RF. Cependant, pour offrir la meilleure qualit sonore aux auditeurs de votre transmission, Harris recommande de tenir le microphone au moins 5 cm (2 po) de votre bouche et lgrement dplac sur un ct. Tableau 2-1 : Distances de test de conformit des expositions aux RF (pire des scnarios) RADIOFRQUENCES
(136 - 174 MHz) VHF UHF
(378 - 522 MHz) 700/800 MHz
(768 - 776 MHz)
(798 - 806 MHz)
(806 - 824 MHz)
(851 - 870 MHz) 900 MHz
(935-944 MHz)
(896-902 MHz) 2400 MHz
(2412 - 2472 MHz) 5 GHz
(5.18 - 5.825 GHz) CORPS3 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm 1,2 cm VISAGE 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 2,5 cm 1,2 cm 2,5 cm 3 Ce est le pire des cas base sur le corps plus mince monter accessoire (clip ceinture). 14 AVERTISSEMENT 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Dans cette section figurent les renseignements ncessaires pour sensibiliser lutilisateur lexposition aux RF et sur ce quil faut faire pour sassurer que cette radio fonctionne dans les limites dexposition aux RF de la FCC. 2.2.2 Interfrence/Compatibilit lectromagntique Pendant les transmissions, cette radio Harris produit de lnergie des RF qui peut causer de linterfrence avec dautres appareils ou systmes. Pour viter de telles interfrences, fermez la radio dans les zones o il est indiqu de le faire. Nutilisez PAS le transmetteur dans des zones sensibles aux radiations lectromagntiques, comme les hpitaux, les avions et les sites de dtonation. 2.3 INTERFRENCE DES RADIOFRQUENCES 2.3.1 Partie 15 de la FCC Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :
1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer une interfrence nuisible; et 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris une interfrence qui peut causer un fonctionnement non souhait. 2.3.2 Industrie Canada Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 2.4 CONSEILS DUTILISATION Lemplacement et ltat de lantenne sont importants pour lutilisation dune radio portative. Lutilisation de la radio dans des zones de faible lvation, sous des lignes lectriques ou des ponts, lintrieur dun vhicule ou dans un immeuble ossature mtallique, peut rduire la porte de lappareil de manire considrable. Les montagnes peuvent galement rduire la porte de lunit. Dans les zones o la transmission ou la rception est insatisfaisante, certaines amliorations peuvent tre obtenues en sassurant que lantenne est verticale. Se dplacer de quelques mtres dans une autre direction ou un emplacement plus lev peut galement amliorer les communications. Lutilisation dune antenne fixe lextrieur peut faciliter le fonctionnement dans un vhicule. Ltat de la pile est un autre facteur important dune utilisation sans tracas dune radio portative. Chargez toujours correctement la pile. 2.5 UTILISATION EFFICACE DE LA RADIO Gardez lantenne dans une position verticale pendant la rception ou la transmission dun message. Ne tenez PAS lantenne lorsque la radio est allume !
15 MISE EN GARDE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 2.5.1 Entretien Et Remplacement De Lantenne Nutilisez pas la radio portative si son antenne est endommage ou absente. Une brlure lgre peut se produire au contact dune antenne endommage avec la peau. Remplacez immdiatement une antenne endommage. Lutilisation dune radio portative alors que lantenne est absente peut causer des blessures, endommager la radio et pourrait enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. Utilisez seulement lantenne fournie ou une antenne approuve. Des antennes non autorises, des modifications ou des ajouts une antenne peuvent endommager la radio et enfreindre la rglementation de la FCC. (Reportez-vous Table 4-1.) 2.5.2 Appareils lectroniques Lnergie des RF provenant de radios portatives peut affecter certains appareils lectroniques. La majorit de lquipement lectronique moderne dans les voitures, les hpitaux, les maisons, etc. est blind contre lnergie des RF. Cependant, dans les zones o lon vous demande de fermer lquipement de radio bidirectionnelle, respectez toujours les rgles. En cas de doute, teignez-le !
2.5.3 Avion teignez toujours une radio portative avant dembarquer bord dun avion !
Ne lutilisez au sol quavec la permission de lquipage. NE lutilisez PAS durant le vol !
2.5.4 Dtonateurs lectriques Pour prvenir la dtonation accidentelle des dtonateurs lectriques, nutilisez PAS de radios bidirectionnelles moins de 305 m (1 000 pi) des oprations de dtonation. Respectez toujours les indications teindre les radios bidirectionnelles situes l o des dtonateurs lectriques sont utiliss. (Norme OSHA : 1926.900) 16 MISE EN GARDE AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT MISE EN GARDE MISE EN GARDE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 2.5.5 Atmosphre Potentiellement Explosive Les zones ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive sont souvent, mais pas toujours, identifies clairement comme telles. Il peut sagir de zones dalimentation en carburant, comme les postes dessence, les installations de stockage ou de transfert de carburant ou de produits chimiques, ainsi que les zones dont lair contient des produits chimiques ou des particules, comme des grains, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Des tincelles dans de telles zones peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie, causant ainsi des blessures ou mme la mort. teignez les radios bidirectionnelles dans toute zone ayant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. Il est rare, mais pas impossible quune radio ou ses accessoires produisent des tincelles. 17 MISE EN GARDE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 3. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 3.1 CLASS 1, DIVISION 2 OPTION Radios ordered with the Class 1, Division 2 option are suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D or non-hazardous (unclassified) locations only. Les radios commandes avec loption Classe 1, Division 2 sont adquates pour utilisation en Classe 1, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C et D, ou en lieux non-hasardeux (non-classifis) seulement EXPLOSION HAZARD REPLACE BATTERY PACK ONLY IN AN AREA KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS, AND ONLY WITH HARRIS PART NO. 14035-4010-05. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION LES BATTERIES DOIVENT TRE REMPLACES DANS UNE ZONE RECONNUE NON-HASARDEUSE SEULEMENT, ET SEULEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE HARRIS PORTANT LE NUMRO DE PICE 14035-4010-05. EXPLOSION HAZARD Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION Une substitution de toute composante pourrait compromettre la convenance pour la Classe I, Division 2. EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not exceed maximum battery charging current of 5.250 A or maximum charging voltage of 12.0 V DC at any time. CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or explosion when heated above 100C (212F) or incinerated. Replace battery with Harris Part No. 14035-4010-05 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. Battery replacement instructions: Remove battery by 1) depressing battery latches then 2) remove battery from radio chassis. Install replacement battery by inserting battery in radio chassis opening and depressing battery into chassis until both battery latches are engaged. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. EXPLOSION HAZARD In addition to any simple single-ended coil antenna and carrying case option, only the following Harris accessories may be used with this radio:
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 14035-4700-01 Speaker Mic, Revo NC2. Can only be used with earphones LS103239V1 and LS103239V2. 12082-0600-01 Speaker Microphone 12082-0600-02 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button 12082-0650-01 Microphone, Palm,2 Wire, Black 18 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 12082-0650-02 Microphone, Palm, 2 Wire, Beige 12082-0650-03 Microphone, Mini-Lapel,3 Wire, Black 12082-0650-04 Microphone, Mini-Lapel,3 Wire, Beige 12082-0650-05 Earphone Kit, Black 12082-0650-06 Earphone Kit, Beige 12082-0650-07 Headset, In-Ear, Boom Mic, In-Line PTT 12082-0650-08 Headset, Lightweight, Over-the-Head, Single Ear, In-Line PTT 12082-0650-09 Headset, Lightweight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, In-Line PTT 12082-0650-10 Headset, Lightweight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, Pigtail PTT 12082-0650-13 Headset, Heavy Duty, Behind-the-Head, w/PTT 12082-0650-14 Headset, Heavy Duty, Over-the-Head, w/PTT 12082-0650-15 Headset, Behind-the-Head, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT 12082-0650-16 Headset, Tactical, Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT 12082-0650-17 Skull Mic, w/Body PTT and Earcup 12082-0650-18 Throat Mic, W/Acoustic Tube & Body PTT 12082-0650-19 Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, Body and Ring PTT LS103239V1 Earphone, Lapel Microphone, 2.5mm LS103239V2 Earphone, Lapel Microphone, 2.5mm, RT Angle 12150-1000-01 Fire Speaker Mic (FSM), Premium, Noise Cancelling 3.2 CLASS 1, DIVISION 1 OPTION APPLIES TO XL-200P C1D1 NON-REBANDED, XL-200P C1D1 REBANDED, XL-185 C1D1 NON-REBANDED, XL-185P C1D1 REBANDED, XL-185 C1D1 UHF, and XL-185 C1D1 VHF Radios ordered with the Class 1, Division 1 option are considered intrinsically safe apparatus. These radios are intrinsically safe to U.S. standard ANSI/TIA 4950-A and are suitable for use in the following locations:
US:
Canada:
Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous (unclassified) locations only. Classe I, Division 1, Groupes C et D; Classe II, Division 1, Groupes E, F et G; Classe III, Division 1 emplacements dangereux; Classe 1, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C et D, ou en sites non-hasardeux (non-
classifis) seulement. Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D or non-hazardous (unclassified) locations only. Classe 1, Division 2 sont adquates pour utilisation en Classe 1, Division 2, Groupes A, B, C et D, ou en lieux non-hasardeux (non-classifis) seulement. 19 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M EXPLOSION HAZARD REPLACE BATTERY PACK ONLY IN AN AREA KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS, AND ONLY WITH HARRIS PART NO. 14035-4010-05. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION LES BATTERIES DOIVENT TRE REMPLACES DANS UNE ZONE RECONNUE NON-HASARDEUSE SEULEMENT, ET SEULEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE HARRIS PORTANT LE NUMRO DE PICE 14035-4045-01. EXPLOSION HAZARD Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class I, Division 1; Class II, Division 1; Class III, Division 1; or Class 1, Division 2. AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DEXPLOSION Une substitution de toute composante pourrait compromettre la convenance pour la Classe I, Division 1; Classe II, Division 1; Classe III, Division 1; ou Classe 1, Division 2. EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not exceed maximum battery charging current of 1.7 A or maximum charging voltage of 8.4 V DC at any time. CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or explosion when heated above 100C (212F) or incinerated. Replace battery with Harris Part No. 14035-4045-01 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. Battery replacement instructions: Remove battery by 1) depressing battery latches then 2) remove battery from radio chassis. Install replacement battery by inserting battery in radio chassis opening and depressing battery into chassis until both battery latches are engaged. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire. EXPLOSION HAZARD In addition to any simple single-ended coil antenna and carrying case option, only the following Harris accessories may be used with this radio:
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION APPROVED HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 12082-0600-01 Standard Speaker Mic Non-Antenna 12082-0600-02 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button US: Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations 20 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION APPROVED HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 12082-0600-03 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 18 Not approved for XL-185P 12082-0650-13 Headset, Heavy Duty, Behind-the-
Head, w/PTT 12082-0650-14 Headset, Heavy Duty, Over-the-Head, w/PTT LS103239V1 Earphone for speaker/mic LS103239V2 Earphone for speaker/mic, Right Angle 12082-0600-04 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 25.6 - Not approved for XL-185P 12082-0600-05 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 30 - Not approved for XL-185P 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G; Class III, Division 1 hazardous locations; Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations US: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations Canada: Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations 21 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M INTRODUCTION 4. 4.1 DESCRIPTION XL Series portable radios provide the advanced connectivity that first responders require while addressing evolving voice and data communications. They meet MIL-STD-810G for durability and are certified to more stringent MIL-STD parameters for contamination by fluids and explosive atmospheres. XL portable radios support P25 Trunking, P25 Conventional, Enhanced Digital Access Communications System
(EDACS), analog conventional, and BeOn operation over a Wi-Fi or LTE network. EDACS operation is not supported in UHF or VHF. Refer to the BeOn Configuration and Use Feature Manual 14221-7200-6130 for details on configuring and using BeOn on the XL Series radios. The XL-200P is a P25 converged, multiband Land Mobile Radio with LTE. Designed for anyone who needs to communicate with multiple agencies or across multiple bands, the XL-200P delivers mission-
critical connectivity. The XL-185P is a P25 converged single-band Land Mobile Radio with LTE, available in VHF, UHF, 700/800, or 900 MHz frequencies. This premium portable delivers a powerful set of XL capabilities, making it the best value in its class. Radio features include:
Extremely Rugged Exceeds the standards of other radios on the market. Multiband Operation Supports any combination of VHF, UHF, and 700/800 MHz frequencies. Also allows different bands to be enabled for selected users. Single-key DES Encryption Provides basic secure communications without having to buy the complete encryption option. Instant Recall of Received Audio Allows user to replay the last transmission received to avoid unnecessary repetition. Active Noise Cancellation With three internal microphones to transmit intelligible audio from users in loud environments. Built-in GPS For location reporting and rapid response for emergencies. Integrated Bluetooth For wireless interface to selected accessories. Wi-Fi Connectivity Permits simple and easy radio software and personality updates. Wi-Fi Access Point Radios that include the LTE option can be configured via RPM2 to act as a Wi-
Fi access point and/or router, providing access to broadband data for Wi-Fi devices. Refer to RPM2s online help when configuring the radio for these functions. Covert Mode Allows users to quickly configure the radio for operation in a covert environment. Fully Programmable Keypad Each key can be programmed to a variety of functions. Four-position switch Provides added configuration flexibility. Unique User Interface Tools specially designed by first responders make radio operation simple and intuitive. An easy-to-read multi-color front display and a monochromatic top display with optional colored backlighting enhance communications for improved user safety. 22 NOTE Refer to Table 4-1 for the list of options and accessories. Additional accessories may have been added since publication of this manual; contact Harris for more information. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Store your radio and batteries in a clean, cool [not exceeding 86 F (+30 C)], dry, and ventilated storage area. 4.2 STORAGE GUIDELINES 4.3 BASIC SETUP 4.3.1 Assemble the Radio Only use a Harris charger approved for the battery chemistry. Injury could occur from improper charger use. Do not over-tighten the antenna as damage could result. Fully charge the battery before first use. Due to government regulations, batteries ship in a discharged state and may require up to two (2) minutes in a charger for successful initialization. During initialization, the charger does not show any charge indication. After this initialization period, charging resumes normally. 1. Make sure batteries are charged per the manual supplied with the charger. 2. To attach optional belt clip, remove the existing tab from the back of the radio above the battery compartment. Slide the belt clip into the groove. 3. Lift clip, if installed, and slide top of battery into top of battery compartment at the rear of the radio. 4. Press down on bottom side of battery until it snaps into place. Figure 4-1: Radio Assembly 23 WARNING CAUTION NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4.3.2 Removing the Battery To remove, press and hold the two tabs at the bottom of the battery and then pull battery up and out of the radio. Figure 4-2: Remove the Battery 4.3.3 Removing the Optional Belt Clip or D-Post Remove the battery before removing the belt clip or D-Post. To remove the belt clip, pry up on the metal spring towards the top of the battery compartment (see Figure 4-3) using a flat head screwdriver and slide the belt clip or D-Post out of the groove in the back of the radio. Figure 4-3: Remove Belt Clip 24 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4.3.4 Install the SIM Card Figure 4-4 shows how to install the SIM card in the LTE version of the radio. 1. Remove the battery as shown in Figure 4-2. 2. Remove the SIM card door cover by loosening the two screws on the SIM door using a T6 driver. 3. Install NANO SIM in slot. See orientation below:
4. Re-install the SIM door using the two screws and T6 driver. Figure 4-4: SIM Card Installation 5. Reinstall battery by inserting battery in radio chassis opening and pressing the battery into the chassis until both battery latches are engaged. 25 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4.4 UNIVERSAL DEVICE CONNECTOR The Universal Device Connector (UDC) provides connections for external accessories such as a headset, a speaker-microphone, audio test box, audio test cables, and programming cables. The UDC is located on the right side of the radio, opposite the PTT Button. The UDC facilitates programming and testing the radio. The UDC pins perform different functions depending on the accessory attached to the UDC. Figure 4-5: Universal Device Connector 4.5 CLEANING Keep the exterior of the radio, battery, antenna, and radio accessories clean. Periodically clean using the following procedures:
1. To remove dust and dirt, clean using damp clean cloth (warm water and mild detergent soap or Simple Green). 2. Follow by wiping with damp (warm water) clean cloth. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 3. Remove the battery and wipe the battery and radio contacts using a soft dry cloth to remove dirt or grease. This will ensure efficient power transfer from the battery to the radio. 4. Remove any accessories and clean the UDC contacts using a clean dry cloth. When the UDC is not in use, cover the connector with the protective dust cap to prevent the build-up of dust or water particles. 5. If the radio is used in a harsh environment (such as driving rain, salt fog, etc.), it may be necessary to periodically dry and clean the battery and radio contacts with a soft dry cloth or soft-bristle non-metallic brush. 26 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M For more rigorous cleaning, use the following procedure:
CAUTION Do not use chemical cleaners, spray, or petroleum-based products. They may damage the radio housing. We recommend using Calla 1452 or equivalent. 1. Apply the cleaning solution to a clean damp cloth and clean the radio. Do not spray cleaning solution directly on radio. To clean the radio in the speaker and microphone areas, carefully wipe these areas but prevent the cleaning solution from entering the speaker or microphone openings. NOTE 2. Wipe off the radio with clean damp cloth using mild warm soapy water. 3. Follow up by wiping off the radio with clean damp cloth using warm water only. 4. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 4.6 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Only use Harris approved accessories. Refer to Harris Product and Services catalog for the complete list of options and accessories available. Contact Harris for requirements not contained in this list:
Always use the correct options and accessories (battery, antenna, speaker/mic, etc.) for the radio. Immersion rated options must be used with an immersion rated radio. Refer to Table 4-1. CAUTION CAUTION Refer to Section 3 for radios with C1D2 or C1D1 options. Table 4-1: Options and Accessories PART #
XL-200P OPTION #
XL-185P OTION #
DESCRIPTION ANTENNAS Full Spectrum Antenna Wideband Whip Antenna 378-520 MHz, 762-870 MHz Wave Whip Antenna, 762-870 MHz Wave Whip Antenna, 762-870 MHz Wave Whip Antenna, 762-944 MHz XL-
185P Only Wave Whip Antenna, 762-944 MHz XL-
185P Only Wave Whip Antenna, 890-960 MHz XL-185P Only Wave Whip Antenna (764 870 MHz) Wave Stub Antenna (764 870 MHz) Helical VHF BATTERIES/CHARGERS Battery, Li-Ion, 3100 mAH, UL Battery, Li-Ion, Hi-Capacity, 4800 mAH Battery, Li-Ion, Hi-Capacity, 4800 mAH, C1D2 Battery, Li-Ion, 3100 mAH 14035-4000-01 14035-4420-01 14035-4440-02 14035-4440-01 14035-4450-02 14035-4450-01 E75-0286-001 KRE1011506/1 KRE1011506/2 KRE1011219/2 14035-4010-05 14035-5050-01 14035-5050-02 14035-4010-04 XL-NC5Z XL-NC8E XL-NC8F XL-NC8D NA NA NA XL-NC5K XL-NC5X XL-NC1C XS-NC5Z XS-NC8E XS-NC8F XS-NC8D XS-NC8L XS-NC8K NA N/A N/A N/A XL-PA3X XS-PA3X XL-PA3V XS-PA3V 27 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M DESCRIPTION PART #
XL-200P OPTION #
XL-185P OTION #
XL-PA4F XS-PA4F Battery, Li-Ion, 7.2VDC, 3100 mAH C1D1 Battery, Li-Ion, 3100 mAH, LTE 14035-4045-01 14036-4020-01 Battery, Li-Ion,3100 mAH, LTE, UL C1D2 14036-4020-02 14035-4700-01 XL-AE2V XS-AE2V Charger, Single Bay Charger, Multi Bay Charger, Vehicular AUDIO ACCESSORIES Speaker Mic, Revo NC2. Can only be used with earphones LS103239V1 and LS103239V2. Speaker Microphone Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 18 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 25.6 Speaker Microphone, Emergency Button, Antenna, 30 Speaker Microphone, Wireless, Bluetooth Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling Speaker Microphone, Premium, Fire, Noise Cancelling, High Visibility Yellow Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Black Microphone, Palm, 2-Wire, Beige Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Black Microphone, Mini-Lapel, 3-Wire, Beige Earphone Kit, Black Earphone Kit, Beige Headset, Light Weight, Over-the-Head, Single Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual In-Ear, In-Line PTT Headset, Light Weight, Behind-the-Head, Dual In-Ear, Pig Tail PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Behind-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, Heavy Duty, Over-the-Head, w/PTT Headset, BTH Boom Mic, Earpiece, w/PTT Skull Mic, w/Body PTT, Earcup Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, Body PTT Throat Mic, w/Acoustic Tube, body and Ring PTT Bluetooth, Covert, Earpiece/MIC/PTT, Radios Earphone, Lapel Microphone Earphone, Speaker Mic, Right Angle, 2.5 MM MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Cable, Data Interface Cable, MATQ-03424, Test 14035-1800-01 14035-1800-02 14035-4100-01 12082-0600-01 12082-0600-02 12082-0600-03 12082-0600-04 12082-0600-05 12082-0681-01 12150-1000-01 12082-0650-01 12082-0650-02 12082-0650-03 12082-0650-04 12082-0650-05 12082-0650-06 12082-0650-12 12082-0650-13 12082-0650-14 12082-0650-15 12082-0650-17 12082-0650-18 12082-0650-19 12082-0684-01 LS103239V1 LS103239V2 XL-PA2A XL-PA3X XL-CH4X XL-CH5A XL-CH4W XL-AE9N XL-AE4B XL-AE2K XL-AE2J XL-AE2L XL-AE6K XL-AE1T XL-AE6G XL-AE6M XL-AE6H XL-AE6N NA NA XL-AE2F XL-AE1P XL-AE1R XL-AE2G XL-AE1L XL-AE1M XL-AE1N XL-AE1S XL-AE3Z XL-AE1K 12150-1000-05 XL-AE1X XS-AE1X 12082-0650-08 XL-AE2B XS-AE2B 12082-0650-09 XL-AE2C XS-AE2C 12082-0650-10 XL-AE2D XS-AE2D 12082-0650-11 XL-AE2E XS-PA2A XS-PA3X XS-CH4X XS-CH5A XS-CG42 XS-AE9N XS-AE4B XS-AE2K XS-AE2J XS-AE2L XS-AE6K XS-AE1T XS-AE6G XS-AE6M XS-AE6H XS-AE6N NA NA XS-AE2E XS-AE2F XS-AE1P XS-AE1R XS-AE2G XS-AE1L XS-AE1M XS-AE1N XS-AE1S XS-AE3Z XS-AE1K XS-CJ4A NA 12082-0445-A1 12082-0435-A1 XL-CJ4A NA 28 DESCRIPTION PART #
XL-200P OPTION #
XL-185P OTION #
Cable, USB, Key Loading/Programming Cable, KVL, Key Loading Adapter, 6-Pin Hirose Holster, Leather, Radio, Premium Holster, Leather W/Rings, Radio, Premium Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Premium Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Premium Case, Leather, Premium, Belt Loop, D-
swivel Case, Leather, Premium, Shoulder Strap Case, Leather, Premium, Shoulder Strap Holster, Leather W/Rings, Radio, Standard Holster, Nylon, Black, Radio, Standard Holster, Ring, Leather, Radio, Standard Belt Loop, Leather, Premium D-Swivel Strap, Shoulder Metal Belt Clip Case, Leather, Premium, Shoulder Strap Belt Loop, Leather Holster, Leather, Premium Holster, Leather W/Rings, Premium Side Connector Cover Leather Case, 2.5" Belt Loop, D-Swivel Leather Case, 3" Belt Loop 12082-0410-A1 12082-0400-A1 14002-0197-01 14035-4200-01 14035-4200-02 14035-4200-03 14035-4200-04 14035-4201-01 14035-4201-02 14035-4202-01 14035-4202-02 14035-4202-03 14035-4202-04 14002-0218-01 12082-3230-01 CC103333V1 12082-1290-01 14035-4201-02 KRY1011609/1 14036-4000-01 14036-4000-02 12082-1398-01 14036-4003-01 14036-4003-02 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M XL-CJ3A XL-CJ3B XL-CJ4B XS-CJ3A XS-CJ3B XS-CJ4B NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA XL-HC4K XL-HC4L XS-HC4K XS-HC4L XL-HC4A XS-HC4A XL-HC3L XL-HC4L XS-HC3L XS-HC4L XL-ZN7V XL-HC4Z XL-HC6A XS-ZN7V XS-HC4Z XS-HC6A 29 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4.7 RELATED PUBLICATIONS The following publications contain additional information about the radio and related products:
MANUAL NUMBER DESCRIPTION 14221-1800-2010 XL-200P/XL-185P Portable Radio Product Safety Manual 14221-1800-1000 XL-200P/XL-185P Portable Radio Quick Guide 14221-1800-8000 XL-200P/XL-185P Portable Radio Software Release Notes MM1000019423 Key Manager and Key Admin Overview and Operation Manual MM1000019424 Key Manager and Key Loader Overview and Operation Manual 14221-1600-2090 Single-Bay Desktop Charger Operator Manual 14221-1600-2110 VC4000 Vehicular Charger Operator Manual 14221-7200-6110 Voice Annunciation Feature Manual 14221-2100-3000 Advanced Access Control/Radio Personality Manager Overview Manual 14221-1100-8170 Radio Personality Manager 2 (RPM2) Software Release Notes 14221-1100-2060 RPM2 Users Manual 14221-7200-6130 BeOn Configuration and Use Feature Manual 14221-1800-4000 Nano SIM Card Install/Replacement Accessory Kit Installation Manual 14221-1800-8000 XLP Radio Software Release Notes 14221-1800-4010 Global Modem Upgrade Kit Installation Guide The product safety manual and the quick guide are included with the radio equipment package when the radio ships from the factory. All publications listed above are available at www.pspc.harris.com via an Information Center login and Tech Link. 30 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. BASIC OPERATION 5.1 RADIO CONTROLS Figure 5-1: Radio Controls Table 5-1 describes the default functions of buttons, knobs, and controls. Most can be programmed for different functions; see Section 7.4 for more information. Table 5-1: Radio Controls, Indicators, and Connectors CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Group/Channel Knob Selects groups/channels. Power/Volume Knob Turn clockwise to power on radio and increase volume of audio heard from speaker. Minimum volume levels may be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. A/B (/O) Switch User-programmable switch (see Section 7.4.2). 31 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Microphone
(Secondary) When noise cancellation is enabled, the secondary and primary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphone is used. See Section 5.18 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. A/B/C/D Switch User-programmable switch (see Section 7.4.3). By default, selects one of four channel banks (see Section 5.13). User-Programmable Buttons Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button Battery Used to select a commonly used function as an alternative to navigating menus. This is configured via programming using Radio Personality Manager 2 (RPM2). See Section 7.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. Press to transmit. Make sure Push-To-Talk (PTT) is enabled (Section 6.5). Battery - Refer to Section 4.3 for battery connection and removal. Antenna Connector Antenna connector. Emergency Button Used to place radio in emergency mode (see Section 5.34). This button can be disabled via programming using RPM2. In addition, this button can be used in conjunction with a User-Programmable Button to clear emergencies if configured to do so. Indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) Indicates radio status:
Red = actively transmitting. Green = actively receiving. Orange = actively transmitting encrypted. Top Display Shows summary of radio operation, including channel/talkgroup (which can be color coded), as well as a variety of programmable icons. Display orientation can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio. (Section 6.6). Speaker Radio speaker which can be muted (Section 6.5). Adjust volume using the Power/Volume knob. Microphone (Primary) When noise cancellation is enabled, the primary and secondary microphones are used together to form a dual microphone system. Noise cancellation improves the quality of transmitted voice. When noise cancellation is disabled, only the primary microphone is used. See Section 5.9 for detailed information on using noise cancellation. Front Display Front display shows complete status and radio menus. User-Programmable Soft Keys User-programmable dynamic keys that have their current function labeled on the radio display directly above each button. See Section 7.4.1 for the options that can be programmed to these buttons. Menu/Select Button From the Main Display, press this button to access the menu. Also, selects highlighted menu items. 32 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M CONTROL/INDICATOR FUNCTION Navigation Buttons Navigates menu items. In addition:
Press the left navigation button while on the idle display to access Channel Information (see Section 6.4). By default, this feature is disabled by RPM2. Press the down navigation button while on the idle display to display the functions assigned to programmable buttons (see Section 7.4). Press the up navigation button to display Missed Call info. Press the right navigation button to end or reject an I-Call. Keypad By default, used to enter text or numbers. Can be programmed for various functions
(see Section 7.4). 5.2 SOFT DTMF KEYPAD The partial keypad model of the radio supports a soft DTMF keypad. This allows the radio user to utilize a graphical DTMF keypad in place of a physical DTMF keypad. On screens that require keypad entry, press the KEYPAD softkey to display the keypad. Use the navigation buttons to highlight the desired number, press the Menu/Select button to select highlighted digit, and then press the ENTER softkey. For example, when placing an Individual Call to a numeric address, the soft DTMF keypad can be used to enter the address as shown:
Figure 5-2: Using the Soft DTMF Keypad 5.3 BEFORE FIRST USE Make sure the radio has:
Fully charged battery Antenna attached Personality and radio programmed using RPM2 Encryption keys loaded if using encrypted channels Personality activated 33 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.4 POWER ON AND SET VOLUME The power switch and volume control are the same knob on top of the radio (see Figure 5-1). Turn the Power/Volume Knob clockwise to power on radio and increase the volume. The radio can be programmed to play an audible tone when changing the volume. A minimum volume level can be programmed into the radio to prevent missed calls due to a low volume setting. The radio can be programmed to require the entry of a PIN to operate the radio. Check with your System Administrator if you forget your PIN. As the PIN is entered, an asterisk is displayed for each digit; the actual value is not displayed. 5.5 VIDA ID VIDA ID provides the capability to provision the VIDA User Personality configured in the UAS to radios operating on P25 networks via a User Login. Each personality can contain up to 16 profiles and each profile can contain up to sixteen Talk Groups. Refer to Section 10.1 for a list of potential login and provisioning error messages and what to do if they occur. 5.5.1 User Login User Login enables multiple radio users to pick a radio from a fleet pool and enter unique credentials to log into the P25 system. Upon successful login, the Alias associated with the radio user is displayed at various end points in the P25 system. A user can login on up to three (3) devices simultaneously. For example, if the same user is logged into a portable radio and mobile radio, the P25 system can differentiate the subscribers while transparently displaying the alias to other users. Login can be initiated by a menu option, a button programmed for user login, or by selecting a P25 system that requires login. To login manually:
1. From the UTILITY radio menu, select USER LOGIN, or press the button programmed for User 2. Enter the System ID, User ID, and Password, as required. Login. 3. Select Login. 5.5.2 Provisioning If provisioning is enabled via radio programming and the user has successfully logged in, the VIDA User Personality configured in the UAS is provisioned to the radio. When no VIDA Provisioned database is available, the radio will operate using the RPM2-programmed personality. 34 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.6 RADIO DISPLAYS 5.6.1 Top Display The top display (Figure 5-3) shows a summary of status, such as channel number/bank, channel short name, battery, scanning, and emergency mode. The display can be configured for viewing from the front or rear of the radio (see Section 6.6). The channel short name is programmed using RPM2. Figure 5-3: Top Display 5.6.2 Front Display Figure 5-4 shows a sample front display while on the idle screen. The idle screen appears after power up or after exiting from the menus. Figure 5-4: Sample Idle Front Display The radio can be programmed to display the User ID on the System line of the display. 35 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Table 5-2 describes some of the icons that may be displayed by the radio. The radio menu also contains an icon glossary in the Utility Menu (see Section 5.9). Icons and their location can be customized using RPM2. Table 5-2: Radio Icons ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION Analog Conventional System P25 Conventional System P25 Trunked System EDACS System Zone User Defined Zone Battery Fully Charged OTAR Registered Vote Scanning
(Blue) Trunked Signal Strength
(Red) TX Power
(Green)
(No Color) Channel Idle Receive Signal Strength
(Orange) Transmitting Encrypted Battery Level 100% Capacity Battery Level 75% Capacity Battery Level 50% Capacity Battery Level 25% Capacity Battery Level 5% Capacity
(Low Battery Audio Indicator) Battery Level Battery Exhausted
(RX-Only State) Bluetooth Enabled Monitor On
(Blue) Bluetooth Connected VDOC Encryption Enabled Receiving Data Global Encryption Transmitting Data OTAR Disabled Alert(s) Present OTAR Registering Scanning Enabled OTAR Rekeying Emergency Transmit Power Level High RX Mail Transmit Power Level Low Noise Cancellation Enabled RX Only Fire Speaker Mic Attached Speaker Muted Nuisance Channel Battery Charging TX Disabled Talkaround Enabled Tones Disabled Conventional Site Unregistered Conventional Site Registered Failsoft PTT Disabled Type 99 Enabled LTE Registered Foreign Network LTE Denied or Unknown Registration Status GPS Tracking LTE Registered Home LTE No Signal Wi-Fi Clients Connected 36 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION Wi-Fi Signal Strength Indicator Wi-Fi Network Currently Connected Wi-Fi Network in Process of Connecting Mandown Add New Wi-Fi Client A wearable Bluetooth device is attached
(e.g., SCBA) 5.7 MANDOWN If enabled via radio programming, the following conditions can be configured to trigger a Mandown condition:
MOTION - Mandown is declared with lack of motion. TILT - Mandown is declared when the radio is tilted. BOTH - Mandown is declared by radio tilting and lack of motion. This can be useful if, for example, a radio user is in danger and has not moved for a certain amount of time. If the users movement falls below the configured level, then a tone begins playing. An Emergency is declared on the channel/group based on the radios Emergency configuration. 5.8 STATUS MESSSAGES The radio may display various radio Status Messages during operation. These messages are described in Table 5-3. Table 5-3: Status Messages DESCRIPTION MESSAGE PTT DENIED P25 Trunked and EDACS - The radio or talkgroup is not authorized to operate on the selected system and/or talkgroup. CALL QUEUED P25 Trunked and EDACS - The system has placed the call in a request queue. SYSTEM BUSY P25 Trunked and EDACS - The system is busy, no channels are currently available, the queue is full, or an individual call is being attempted to a radio that is currently transmitting. SCANNING The radio is scanning. TX EMERGENCY An emergency call is being transmitted. RX EMERGENCY An emergency call is being received. The radio displays the unit name or unit ID. WIDE AREA SCAN P25 Trunked and EDACS - The radio has entered the Wide Area Scan mode to search for a new system. INVALID TALKGROUP P25 Trunked and EDACS - The current talkgroup is not valid for the current system. This could happen if the site denies registration due to an unrecognized talkgroup ID. INVALID UNIT P25 Trunked and EDACS - The current unit is not valid for the current system. REGISTERING P25 Trunked only - Displayed when the radio is performing a registration/affiliation on a P25 trunking site. CTRL CHANNEL SCAN P25 Trunked and EDACS - The control channel is lost and the radio has entered the Control Channel Scan mode to search for the control channel (usually out of range indication). BAND SCANNING MISSED CALL OTAR REKEY COMPLETE P25 Trunked - Only displayed if the system is configured for "EnhancedCC" mode of operation. When the radio cannot find a Control Channel in either the trunked frequency set or the list of discovered adjacencies, the radio can perform a full spectrum frequency scan to find a new Control Channel. P25 Modes and EDACS - Another user has tried to call or page this radio. The user can view who the caller was by pressing the up navigation button. OTAR Rekey operation completed successfully. 37 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M MESSAGE USER REGISTRATION FAILED User Login failed. Change selected system/zone or re-enter credentials. DESCRIPTION 5.9 PREDEFINED MENU LAYOUTS Depending on radio programming, some menu options described in this manual may not be available. The radio supports three predefined menu layouts: Full, Custom, and Restricted. Table 5-4 details what is available in each layout:
The Custom predefined menu layout allows the administrator to customize the list of menu items that are available to the radio user. Table 5-4 lists the default settings. Table 5-4: Predefined Menu Layouts MENU FULL CUSTOM
(Default Settings) RESTRICTED Call Menu Exit Emergency Talkaround Individual Call Change Talkgroup Call Alert/Page Channel Guard Audio Playback Tone Encode T99 Audio Settings Display Settings GPS Settings Clock Settings Bluetooth Settings Scan Menu Enable/Disable Scan View Scan List Edit Zone Scan List View Custom Channels Edit Custom Scan List Custom Scan Site Roam Site Alias Security Menu Encryption Enable Zeroize Global CKR Enable GCKR Key Select Active Key Set Key List 38 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M MENU FULL CUSTOM
(Default Settings) RESTRICTED OTAR Enable OTAR Rekey Message Menu Radio Status Radio Message Textlink Messages Textlink Forms Textlink Mailbox Faults Program Menu Activate Plan Activate Profile Maintenance Menu Radio Info Battery TCXO Tuning P25 Tests RSSI Display Phase II Display Feature Info WiFi Client WiFi Access Point Change Language Change PIN LTE Icon Glossary User Login System ID Unit ID Password Install GPP Software x Zone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No No Yes No No No Yes No No No No Yes No No No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 5.10 MENU Press the Menu/Select button while on the idle display to access the menu. Press the left or right navigation buttons to scroll through the top-level menus and press the up or down navigation buttons to scroll through the sub-menus. Refer to Figure 5-1 for button location. While in a menu, press the Menu/Select button to choose, activate, or toggle the selected item; similar to an enter key. Table 5-5 provides a high-level overview of the menu layout. Menu options on your radio may vary depending on available features and radio programming. 39 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M MENUS CALL MENU:
EXIT EMERGENCY MODE TALKAROUND MODE T99 TOGGLE TONE ENCODE INDIVIDUAL CALL PHONE CALL CHANGE TLKGRP CALL ALERT CHANNEL GUARD AUDIO PLAYBACK SCAN MENU:
START SCAN/STOP SCAN SCAN LISTS ASSIGNED CUSTOM LIST SITE ROAMING SITE ALIAS SECURITY MENU:
ZEROIZE KEYS ENCRYPTION GLOBAL ENCRYPTION GLOBAL KEY ACTIVE KEYSET KEY LIST OTAR OTAR REKEY MESSAGES MENU:
RADIO STATUS RADIO MESSAGE TEXTLINK MESSAGES TEXTLINK FORMS TEXTLINK MAILBOX FAULTS/ALERTS UTILITY MENU:
AUDIO SETTINGS SPEAKER (MUTE/UNMUTE) NOISE CANCELLATION PTT TONES KEYPAD TONES DISPLAY SETTINGS COLOR SCHEME FRONT BACKLIGHT FRONT BRIGHTNESS Table 5-5: Menu Navigation DESCRIPTION Exits emergency. See Section 5.34 for more information. Enable/disable talkaround. See Section 5.24 for more information. Enable/disable T99. See Section 5.25 for more information. Analog conventional only - Transmits a programmed tone sequence on the current radio system and channel. See Section 6.19 for more information. Allows you to select an individual for an individual call. See Section 5.16 for more information. Allows the user to initiate a telephone interconnect call. See Section 5.27 for more information. Change the selected talkgroup. See Section 5.15. Select a group for Call Alert transmission. See Section 5.26. Select the Transmit and/or Receive Channel Guard tone. See Section 5.23. Replays the last recorded call. See Section 5.29 for more information. Start or stop scan operation. See Sections 5.30 and 5.31. View/Edit available scan lists. See Section 6.14. Create, View, and Edit Custom Scan Lists. See Section 6.14.6. Enable/Disable Wide Area System Scan. See Section 6.14.7. Select an available site from this list to lock the radio to; i.e., prevent the radio from roaming. This is also known as Site Lock. See Section 6.14.8 for more information. Removes all encryption keys from the radio. See Section 6.20.2. Enable/Disable encryption. See Section 5.21. Enable/Disable Global Encryption. See Section 6.20.4. Select the Global Key. Only available if Global Encryption is Enabled. See Section 6.20.4. Select the Active Keyset. See Section 6.20.5. View available key lists. See Section 6.20.6. Enable/disable Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR). See Section 6.20.7. Request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. See Section 6.20.7. Used to send a status condition to the site without making a voice call. See Section 6.14.8. Used to send a message to the site without making a voice call. See Section 6.16. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink message. See Section 6.17. Allows the user to send a Radio TextLink form. See Section 6.17. Contains received Radio TextLink messages. See Section 6.17. Displays radio faults and alerts. See Section 6.18. Mute or unmute the speaker audio. Enable or disable Noise Cancellation. See Section 5.18. Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when radio is in the holster or you are getting into a car. Enable or disable radio side tones. Enable or disable tones that sound when the radios keypad buttons are pressed. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front and top displays COLOR SCHEME for optimum visibility in day or night conditions (NORMAL or INVERTED). Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the front display backlighting between ON/OFF/MOMENTARY/MOMENTARY (OFF). Press the left or right navigation buttons to dim or brighten the display. 40 MENUS FRONT TIMEOUT FRONT DISPLAY OFF TOP BACKLIGHT TOP BRIGHTNESS TOP TIMEOUT TOP ORIENTATION INDICATOR LED BLUETOOTH ENABLED (YES/NO) DISCOVERABLE (YES/NO) VOLUME CONTROL (YES/NO) BLUETOOTH SPEAKER EXTERNAL SPEAKER PAIRING MGMT CLOCK SETTINGS TIME FORMAT TIME ZONE GPS SETTINGS GPS (ENABLED/DISABLED) POSITION INFO ANGULAR UNITS LINEAR UNITS POSITION FORMAT SA OVER NETWORK PROGRAM ACTIVATE PLAN PROFILES MAINTENANCE BATTERY INFO RADIO INFO TESTS PH2 LC DISPLAY DISPLAY RSSI TCXO TUNING FEATURE INFO WIFI CLIENT 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M DESCRIPTION When the FRONT BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays backlight turns off. Press the left or right navigation buttons to change the time in 0.5 second increments. Turns the front display off completely. Press the Menu/Select button to turn the front display back on. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the top display backlighting ON/OFF/MOMENTARY. Press the left or right navigation buttons to dim or brighten the display. When the TOP BACKLIGHT setting is MOMENTARY, this value specifies how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight turns off. Press the left or right navigation buttons to change the time in 0.5 second increments. Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or AUTO. When AUTO is selected, the radio changes the top display to be viewed from the back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle the indicator LED ON or OFF. Enable/disable Bluetooth. See Section 6.10 for more information. If YES, the radio knob can be used to adjust Bluetooth speaker volume (if the Bluetooth device supports it). Mute/Unmute Bluetooth Speaker. Mute/Unmute External Speaker. Pair Bluetooth devices with the radio. See Section 6.10 for more information. Select 12-hour, 12-hour with date toggle, 24-hour, or 24-hour with date toggle time display format. Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). Enable/disable GPS. Displays GPS, Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude information. From this menu, click NEXT to access SA INFO (see Section 6.2). Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, DEGREES, or MILS. Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units: STATUTE, METRIC, or NAUTICAL. Set format of displayed position information: Latitude/Longitude Decimal Degrees
(LAT LONG DD), Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). When Enabled, the radio sends GPS data to a Harris-supplied PC client using RNDIS networking. View/Activate a personality. See Section 6.1. Change current profile. See Section 5.17. When a smart battery is attached, displays detailed battery status information. When a regular battery is attached, displays battery voltage. Displays radio information, i.e., ESN, software revisions, and firmware revisions. Allows service personnel to run radio tests. For field service use only. When enabled, RSSI is displayed on the RSSI screen and in the bottom of the idle display. -130 dBm is displayed when there is no received signal. For field service personnel only. Improper adjustment will result in loss of communications. Displays what features are enabled on your radio. Displays the list of available Wi-Fi clients and the status of Wi-Fi Connection (a question mark indicates the Wi-Fi network is in the process of connecting; a check mark indicates the Wi-Fi Network is connected). 41 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M MENUS POWER ON ADD NEW WIFI ACCESS POINT POWER CLIENT COUNT LTE PLMN (MCC/MNC) Signal Strength Registration Status NGLM IMEI IMSI ICON GLOSSARY USER LOGIN SYSTEM ID UNIT ID PASSWORD INSTALL GPP SOFTWARE CHANGE LANGUAGE CHANGE PIN ZONE MENU DESCRIPTION Turn Wi-Fi on/off. Displays the list of Trusted Wi-Fi Networks and is populated when Wi-Fi is powered on. You can view, add, modify, and remove a Wi-Fi Network. Power Wi-Fi On/Off. When the radio is configured as a Wi-Fi access point, displays the number of connected clients. Displays the Public Land Mobile Network (Mobile Country Code/Mobile Network Code). Displays the LTE signal strength. Indicates if you are registered (connected) to the LTE network. Displays the Next Generation LTE Modules software revision. Displays the International Mobile Equipment Identity. The IMEI is used to identify devices on a network. Displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity. The IMSI is used to identify the user of a cellular network and is a unique identification associated with all cellular networks. Defines icons displayed by the radio. Enables the radio user to login. See Section 5.5.1 for more information. Allows the radio user to enter/change the System ID for user login. Allows the radio user to enter/change the User ID for user login. Allows the radio user to enter the login password for user login. Select a GPP package to install. Press the up or down navigation buttons until the desired language is highlighted and then press Menu/Select button. Allows you to change your PIN. View or change zones/systems (see Sections 5.12 and 6.3.1). 5.11 ALERT TONES The radio provides audible Alert Tones or beeps to indicate various operating conditions. Some of the most common tones are described in Table 5-6. Table 5-6: Alert Tones TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Ready to Talk Tone Unencrypted (Analog FM or P25 digital) After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1000 Hz tone for 25 ms Ready to Talk Tone Encrypted P25 digital After a PTT is pressed, this is an audible indication (tone) for you to begin speaking into the microphone. 1200 Hz tone for 25 ms PTT Denied 544 Hz tone for 75 ms PTT not possible. Momentary tone is present:
Receive only Key not found PTT button disabled Emergency button disabled Emergency not supported for current channel Clear transmit denied Trunking Channel unavailable Maximum transmit duration expires Maximum transmit duration is exceeded. 5 beeps of 2400 Hz tone and then a 544 Hz tone for as long as PTT is pressed 42 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TONE DESCRIPTION SOUND/DURATION Low Battery Alarm Alarm sounds upon initial detection of low battery and every 30 seconds thereafter. Tone stops upon detection of a battery charging state. Emergency Call Received Radio is receiving an emergency call or priority call. Alternate Emergency Tone If enabled via programming, the radio plays an alternate emergency tone when declaring and receiving an emergency. Out of Range Radio fails to find a local control channel. 937 Hz tone for 50 ms Sequence of tones:
Silence for 60 ms 1300 Hz tone for 50 ms 600 Hz tone for 250 ms and 1800 Hz tone for 250 ms Sequence of tones:
Silence for 20 ms 1000 Hz tone for 150 ms Programmable via RPM2:
Disabled (no tone) Slow (tone every 15s) Medium (tone every 10s) Fast (tone every 5s) Tones is 544 Hz tone for 75 ms 5.12 SELECT ZONE/SYSTEM A System is a group of channels or talkgroups that share a common set of parameters as programmed using RPM2. For example, a Trunking system defines the parameters needed to communicate on an infrastructure by agency or geographical region, such as WACN, System ID, Talkgroups, etc. A conventional system defines the channel set used and any specific signaling attributes (see RPM2 online help for more information on System attributes). A Zone is an OPTIONAL container that can hold channels or talkgroups from a variety of systems (see Section 6.3). In other words, each member of a Zone belongs to an underlying system. Zones are always listed first in the Zone/System menu and are designated by the icon. A button on the radio can be programmed to scroll through available zones/systems (see Section 7.4). If enabled via radio programming, systems are not displayed in the ZONE menu, only zones are displayed. Or To select a zone/system via the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use the left or right navigation buttons to display the ZONE menu. The currently selected zone/system is highlighted. A personality can have up to 512 systems and up to 250 Zones, independent of banks or channels. 3. Use the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired zone/system. Press and hold the up or down button to scroll repetitively; the menu wraps to allow quick access to a zone/system. 4. Press the VIEW ZONE soft key to view channels in the zone/system or select the desired zone/system using the Menu/Select button. 43 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.13 SELECT GROUP/CHANNEL AND BANK The radio can be programmed with 1,250 talkgroups or 1000 channels per personality. Use the Group/Channel knob to select groups/channels 1 - 16. Use the A/B/C/D switch to set the bank. The selected bank is indicated on the display. Bank A: Channel A1 - A16 (1-16) Bank B: Channel B1 - B16 (17-32) Bank C: Channel C1 - C16 (33-48) Bank D: Channel D1 - D16 (49-64) If your system has more than 64 groups/channels, a button on the radio can be programmed for the SEL CHAN/GRP option. This allows you to select a super bank, providing access to groups/channels beyond the first 64. ZONES have a limit of 64 entries per zone and cannot be superbanked. Direct Channel Entry A button on the radio can be programmed for Direct Channel Entry, which allows the user to enter the talkgroup/channel number directly from the keypad. The radio can be programmed for one of the following Direct Channel Entry options:
When a Zone is selected on the radio, Direct Channel Entry performs a lookup using the currently selected systems group list Or When a Zone is selected on the radio, Direct Channel Entry performs a lookup using the currently selected Zones system/group list. 44 5.14 LOCK/UNLOCK KEYPAD There are two levels of keypad lock available. Keypad lock and Radio lock. Keypad lock only locks the navigation keys (except for use in unlock), programmable softkeys, and DTMF keypad. Radio lock disables all physical keys and knobs except:
14221-1800-2000, Rev. M The 4-position switch PTT Emergency Button Any User Programmable Button (UPB) programmed for Monitor/Clear. This is required to allow Monitor/Clear to function for 2-button emergency clear. The A/B switch, ABCD switch, or a button on the radio can be programmed to lock the keypad/radio. If the keypad was locked via a switch, moving the switch to another position will unlock the keypad. If locked via a button, the navigation keys must be used to enter the unlock sequence of Left, Right, Up, Down. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. 5.15 GROUP CALLS 5.15.1 Transmit a Group Call A talkgroup is a group of radios that you want to have private conversations with. These groups can be divided into areas such as state, region, county, or large special events. Turn the Channel/Group knob to select the desired group (see Figure 5-1). Press PTT to transmit. A button on the radio can be programmed for DIRECT CHANNEL ENTRY to allow the user to enter the talkgroup/channel number. Press PTT to transmit. Or Or To transmit a group call:
1. In P25 Conventional, the talkgroup for the selected channel may be overridden as follows: Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight CHANGE TLKGRP and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight and the desired talkgroup and press the Menu/Select button. After selecting the new talkgroup, the radio returns to the main screen. 45 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. Press the PTT button to transmit. 5.15.2 Receive a Group Call When receiving a group call, the status area of the idle display toggles between the Unit Name and the Group Name of the transmitting radio. If either of those names is not programmed, the corresponding ID number is displayed. 46 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.16 INDIVIDUAL CALLS An individual call is used to make a call to one radio as opposed to a group of radios. 5.16.1 Transmit an Individual Call 1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight INDIVIDUAL CALL and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the unit to call and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to make the call. When transmitting an Individual Call, the radio displays the called radios name or Unit ID. If the radio is programmed for Acknowledged Individual Call, the radio displays CALL QUEUED until the callee answers or rejects the call. 6. After the callee answers, press PTT to respond. 7. Press the right navigation button to end the call. How long the radio remains in Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 5.16.2 Receiving an Individual Call 1. When receiving an Individual Call, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. The radio will also display Press to END. 2. Press the PTT button to respond or the right navigation button to END/REJECT the call. How long the radio remains in the Individual Call mode with no activity is programmable. 47 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 3. The radio rings and indicates a missed call if you do not respond. The ring sounds until you press PTT, view the missed call menu using the up navigation button, change channel/group/system, or power cycle the radio. 4. On the missed call screen, press the DISMISS soft key to clear the entry. 5.17 USER PROFILES XL Series radios support User Profiles (also referred to as My Profile). A User Profile is a grouping of preset configurations that allow the user to change radio operation based on current activity/scenario. For example, the radio can be programmed with profiles named Noisy, Fire, etc., and the radio user can switch profiles on the radio depending on the environment they are entering. User Profile selection persists across system/group changes and power cycles. Up to 10 profiles can be programmed to the radio. When you activate a new personality, the selected Profile changes to None. A "Covert" Profile is installed on the radio by default. This profile cannot be modified or deleted. The following attributes apply when the Covert profile is active:
The speaker is enabled. All tones are disabled. Keypad tones are disabled. Voice Annunciation is disabled. The front display backlight is disabled. The top backlight is turned off. The indicator LED is disabled. All other attributes remain at their current value. To change the currently selected Profile:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 48 4. Press the left or right navigation buttons until the PROFILES menu is displayed. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select the desired Profile and press the Menu/Select button. A profile change persists across system/channel changes and power cycles. A button on the radio keypad can be used to toggle profiles. See Section 7.4.1. 5.18 NOISE CANCELLATION XL Series portable radios feature Harris proprietary noise suppression capability to provide clear and crisp voice quality in high-noise environments. This can be used in any mode, including analog and digital communications. The radio has three microphones; two located at the top of the radio (primary) and one on the bottom
(secondary). When noise cancellation is enabled, voice is picked up by the upper left microphone, and noise is picked up from the bottom microphone. In the case where noise cancellation is enabled and a speaker microphone is attached to the radio, talk into the speaker microphone. In this mode, the radios top left microphone is used to pick up the surrounding noise, and the other microphones are unused. See Section 5.18.4 for more information. If the bottom
(secondary) microphone is blocked, the radio operates as though noise cancellation is turned off. 5.18.1 Enable Noise Cancellation To enable Noise Cancellation:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons until the UTILITY menu is displayed. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight NOISE CANCELLATION. Toggle Noise Cancellation ENABLED/DISABLED using the Menu/Select button. Refer to Section 6.5 for more information on the Audio Settings menu. 49 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.18.2 Using Noise Cancellation When using the noise cancellation feature, observe the following:
Verify NOISE CANCELLATION is enabled (see Section 5.18.1). Talk within two (2) inches of the primary microphone (see Figure 5-5). Ensure the primary and secondary microphones are not covered. See Section 5.18.4 for more information on the primary and secondary microphones. Speak clearly, loudly, and with authority. In very noisy environments, it is o.k. to yell into the radio. The radio can handle loud input levels. Figure 5-5: Using Noise Cancellation 5.18.3 The Effect of Distance from the Microphone Unlike a normal microphone system, noise cancellation makes the level of your voice diminish quickly as you move away from the radio. The radio starts to see your voice as surrounding noise. Whereas, you may be comfortable speaking up to a foot away under normal operation, noise cancellation requires that you hold the radio close. 5.18.4 Primary versus Secondary Microphone 5.18.4.1 Without a Speaker Microphone Attached The primary microphone is located on top of the radio and the secondary is on the bottom of the radio (refer to Figure 5-1 for microphone locations). 5.18.4.2 With a Speaker Microphone Attached When a speaker microphone is attached, the radio electronically switches over to use the radios top left microphone as secondary. The microphone on the attached speaker microphone becomes primary. 5.18.5 When using an SCBA Mask When using an SCBA mask, the primary microphone can be held directly against the voice port. If the SCBA has a voice amplifier, the same rule applies. Ensure that the secondary microphone is uncovered. If possible, point the secondary microphone toward the noise source. 50 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.19 PTT OPTIONS The radio can be programmed via RPM2 with one of the following PTT options:
Radio and Accessory - In this mode, when the radio is PTTed the audio source will correspond with the PTT source. If the source of PTT is radio, the audio is routed via the radio microphone. If the source of PTT is an external microphone accessory, the audio is routed via the external microphone accessory. Accessory Only - Any PTT input will have the audio routed through the external microphone accessory. The Bluetooth Speaker Mic is unaffected by this setting. PTTing the Bluetooth Speaker Mic always results in audio being routed via the Bluetooth Speaker Mic. 5.20 VOICE ANNUNCIATION When enabled via programming, Voice Annunciation provides audible feedback for various radio operations. The radio can be programmed to play an audio message for any or all the following. This message can be a pre-recorded (canned) message or a user-recorded message. Zone changes Channel changes System changes Encryption On/Off Noise Cancellation On/Off Scan On/Off Talkaround On/Off Monitor Mode On/Off Two or Four Position switch change For more information on configuring the radio for Voice Annunciation, refer to the Voice Annunciation Feature Manual 14221-7200-6110. 51 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.21 ENABLE/DISABLE ENCRYPTION A switch or a button on the radio can be programmed to enable/disable encryption. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. Or Turn encryption on or off via the Security Menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the menus. 2. Use the left or right navigation buttons button to highlight and select the SECURITY menu. 3. Use the up or down navigation buttons button to highlight ENCRYPTION. Toggle encryption enabled/disabled using the Menu/Select button. This option is grayed out if any switch is programmed for encryption, or if Encryption Mode in the radios personality is programmed Forced On. If a channel is programmed to be encrypted, an optional key icon appears on the main display when encryption is enabled. The system must also be programmed for encryption. When encryption is enabled and you use any channel not configured for encryption, the radio allows PTT. The signal is transmitted unencrypted. Systems configured for Global Encryption (enabled in the Security menu) can display an optional Global Encryption icon in addition to or instead of a key icon (Section 6.20.3). 5.22 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE When transmit is disabled, all forms of transmission from the radio are disabled, including Bluetooth. This is designed for use in explosive atmospheres. If enabled via programming, use the A/B switch to enable or disable transmit. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. 52 NOTE NOTE 5.23 CHANNEL GUARD (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channel Guard is Harriss trademark for CTCSS (tone squelch) and CDCSS (digital tone squelch). 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M The Channel Guard menu is only accessible if the System is setup for CG SEL in the radios personality. To select the Channel Guard tone:
1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Use the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Use the up or down navigation buttons to highlight CHANNEL GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 53 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons to highlight RECEIVE GUARD or TRANSMIT GUARD and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Use the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired option from the list and select using the Menu/Select button. 6. The Channel Guard frequency is displayed on the main display. The Channel Info screen and Channel Edit screen will change depending on this selection. See Sections 6.4 and 7.2 for more information. A button on the radio can be programmed for Channel Guard Override (see Section 7.4). 5.24 USE TALKAROUND TO BYPASS REPEATER (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Talkaround is not supported on 700 MHz in the following 700/800/900 MHz models of XL-185P:
XS-PFM9M XS-PFM9M-LTE XS-PFM9P XS-PFM9Y XS-PFM9Y-LTE XS-PPM9M XS-PPM9M-LTE XS-PFM9P-LTE XS-PPM9P XS-PPM9P-LTE XS-PPM9Y XS-PPM9Y-LTE You can bypass the repeater system to communicate directly with other radios on your current channels receive frequency. This is useful if you are out of range of a repeater or if a repeater is busy. You must be in range of the other radio. In XLP R4A and later, talkaround can be enabled/disabled on a per-channel basis. When talkaround is disabled, the icon is shown on the front and top display. If talkaround is disabled for a channel (via the RPM2 personality), and the user tries to enable talkaround via the menus or knobs while on that channel, the radio emits a boop deny tone. Additionally, if talkaround is disabled on a channel, the talkaround programmable button becomes inoperable and the radio boops. 54 NOTE NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M To enable talkaround:
1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight TALKAROUND MODE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle TALKAROUND MODE to ENABLED. 5. The optional talkaround icon appears. Calls are now made on the receive frequency until you disable talkaround mode via the CALL menu. Power cycling the radio does not disable talkaround. Or A button or switch can be programmed to toggle talkaround enable/disabled. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. If the talkaround Indication feature is enabled using RPM2, the radio will play a unique grant tone when a call is placed on a simplex channel or when talkaround has been enabled on a duplex channel. This feature applies to both Analog and P25 Conventional systems. It optionally allows the radio to also play the same tone when it receives a call while operating in simplex or talkaround. If configured, the radio plays the tone at the selected volume level. The tone will not play on systems configured with MDC. Talkaround Indication can be specified for each individual Analog and P25 Conventional system configured in personality. The following options can be selected, and apply only when the radio is on a simplex channel or when talkaround has been enabled by the user:
Disabled: (This is the default option.) When this option is selected, the radio plays the standard grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit Only: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different talkaround grant tone when a call is placed. The radio does not play a tone when a call is received. Transmit and Receive: When this option is selected, the radio plays a different talkaround grant tone when a call is placed, and at the beginning of a received call. 55 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M In the radio personality, the Alert Tone parameter needs to be enabled for each channel on the Conventional Frequency Set. The Ready to Talk Tone parameter must also be enabled for the Talk Around Indication tone to be played when the radio is keyed. 5.25 TYPE 99 OPERATION Type 99 is Harris' name for in-band, two-tone sequential signaling. It is a conventional signaling protocol used to control the muting and unmuting of a radio. This signaling is commonly used for selective calling of individual units or groups of units in a conventional system. In Type 99 tone systems, calls are not heard until the radio detects the proper two-tone sequence. This, in conjunction with squelch, prevents the user from hearing noise or undesired conversations. When the radio detects the second tone, it sounds the appropriate Type 99 alert tone. After the second tone stops, the receiver audio path is opened for the user to receive messages. 5.25.1 Enable/Disable Type 99 To enable Type 99:
1. Press Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight T99 TOGGLE. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to change T99 TOGGLE between ENABLED and DISABLED. T99 is displayed in the top of the radio display when Type 99 is enabled. A button or switch can be programmed to enable/disable Type 99 (see Section 7.4). 5.25.2 Disable After PTT If this option is programmed using RPM2, Type 99 is disabled after the radio user activates the PTT. This allows the radio user to monitor traffic on the channel (after a PTT action) without pressing the monitor button. Can be used in conjunction with the Auto Reset option (see Section 5.25.3) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. 5.25.3 Auto Reset If this option is programmed using RPM2, Type 99 is automatically reset, or turned back on, after 30 seconds. Can be used in conjunction with the Disable After PTT option (see Section 5.25.2) to disable Type 99 after a PTT and automatically reset, or enable, Type 99 after 30 seconds. Or 56 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.26 CALL ALERT (PAGE) 5.26.1 Send Alert To send an alert:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight CALL ALERT and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired unit from the list and press the Menu/Select button, or select KEYPAD to enter the Unit ID. 5. Press PTT to send the page. 5.26.2 Receive Alert 1. When receiving a Call Alert, the radio displays the calling radios name or Unit ID. 2. The radio rings and indicates a missed call. The ring sounds continuously until you press PTT, press the CLR MISSED softkey, change group/system, or power cycle the radio. 5.27 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight PHONE CALL and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Select an entry from the list of pre-programmed entries or click DIRECT DIAL to enter the number directly. Direct Dial entries can have up to 31 characters (0-9, *, #, or a space; the space correlates to a pause.) Select OPTIONS to view details about the highlighted pre-programmed entry. The radio supports up to 255 pre-programmed entries. 57 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. Press PTT to initiate the phone call. Press the right navigation button to end the call. The radio does not permit telephone interconnect calls during an emergency. While in a phone call, the radio ignores all types of calls EXCEPT a System All Call. If the radio receives a System All Call while in a phone call, it immediately drops the phone call and accepts the All Call. 5.28 DTMF XL Series portables support the transmission of DTMF tones corresponding to the numbers/characters on the keypad. To overdial numbers/characters, press and hold the PTT button, and then press the corresponding keys one at a time on the keypad. Valid keys for DTMF tones are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *, 0, and #. For conventional or P25 Conventional systems, DTMF tones only play if the current system is programmed for DTMF (part of general System configuration). DTMF tones are always enabled for P25 Trunking systems. 5.29 AUDIO PLAYBACK The Audio Playback feature allows the user to playback a previously received call. Recordings are stored in the radios RAM and are not persistent across power cycles. The radio stores the last five recorded calls up to one minute each. A button on the radio can be programmed to replay the last recorded call. To playback the last received call from a button:
1. Press the button programmed for audio playback. The last call received before the button was pressed is played each time the button is pressed. 2. Additional incoming calls will be recorded in the background, but pressing the button continues to replay the captured call until reset. 3. To reset the feature and allow a new call to be captured, press and hold the button until you hear a two-
tone chirp. At this point, the button can be used to capture a new incoming call. You can also playback one of the last five calls received via the menu. To playback a previously received call from the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight AUDIO PLAYBACK and press the Menu/Select button. 58 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 4. Select the desired call from the list (the most recent call is at the top of the list) and press the select button. The selected call will be played. If a button is also programmed for Audio Playback, pressing the button replays the call selected in the menu. The feature must be reset as above to use the button to capture a new call. If a button is not programmed for Audio Playback, then you must navigate back to the menu to play the call again. Any incoming call that occurs during playback preempts the playback. 5.30 START SCAN This procedure assumes that the scan list has been added and the radio is not in active scan. Refer to Section 6.13 for scan setup or Section 5.31 for stopping scan. Refer to Section 6.14.1.1, Section 6.14.1.2, and Section 6.14.1.3 for home and priority channel descriptions. To start scan:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight START SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. START SCAN text changes to STOP SCAN. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. 5. The scan icon is displayed on the idle display when scanning is enabled. 59 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Or To start scan:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired SCAN LIST and press the START SCAN soft key. Or A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. If a switch is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan is disabled. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. 5.31 STOP SCAN 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight STOP SCAN and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan menu. 60 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. Or Or 4. Press the STOP SCAN soft key. A switch or button on the radio can be programmed to start/stop scan. If a switch or button is programmed for start/stop scan, the menu for starting and stopping scan are disabled. See Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches. 5.32 MONITOR AND SQUELCH TYPES (CONVENTIONAL ONLY) The monitor function allows you to temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. The type of squelch used depends on an analog or digital channel. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed to start or stop Monitor (see Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches.). For analog channels, there is:
Noise squelch - any received signal breaks squelch. Continuous Tone Coded Squelch (CTCSS) - squelch is selective based on tone code. Continuous Digital Coded Squelch (CDCSS) - squelch is selective based on digital code. For digital channels, there is:
Monitor squelch - any received digital signal breaks squelch. Normal squelch - Received Network Access Code (NAC) must be correct to break squelch. Selective squelch - Received NAC and talkgroup Identification (ID) or unit ID must be correct to break squelch. 61 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M During encrypted operations, the radio only unmutes when receiving with the same key. 5.33 NUISANCE DELETE A channel can temporarily be deleted from the scan list. The selected channel, priority 1, and priority 2 channels cannot be nuisance deleted. A button or switch on the radio can be programmed for nuisance delete (see Section 7.4 for the various options that can be programmed to the radio buttons and switches). Nuisance delete can only be performed on the active scan list. To perform a nuisance delete from the menu:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the indicates the active scan list; when scanning is stopped, When scanning is started, active scan list. 5. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired channel. 6. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 62 NOTE NOTE 7. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight NUISANCE and press the Menu/Select button. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 8. The icon appears next to the channel and it will not be scanned. 9. Highlight the channel, press the OPTIONS soft key, and select ADD BACK to add channel back to scan list. If you do not add the channel back to the list, the channel will return to the scan list when you cycle radio power or activate a personality. 10. Press the BACK soft key to exit the channel list. 11. Press the BACK soft key to exit the scan list display. 5.34 FAILSOFT 5.34.1 Conventional Failsoft (EDACS Only) In the unlikely event of an EDACS system failure, communications can take place in Conventional Failsoft mode. The radio is automatically directed to a communications channel set up for this purpose. An increase in activity on the channel during Conventional Failsoft operation may be noticed, so be careful not to transmit until the channel is clear. Operation during Conventional Failsoft is the same as operation on a conventional system, except that it is not possible to select a communications channel or use emergency and special call. When trunking is restored, the radio automatically returns to normal operation. Emergency and special calls are not operational during Conventional Failsoft. 5.34.2 Failsoft (P25 Trunked) When the site-link to the VNIC is down, the site is operating in Failsoft mode. Radios operating on that site can still communicate with each other, but not with the rest of the system. The radio provides a visual indicator (
icon) on the display and plays a tone for a configured interval to indicate that the site is in Failsoft. This tone interval range is 0 to 120 seconds. This tone is not played during incoming voice or PTT. 63 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.35 EMERGENCY OPERATION The radio can be programmed to enable emergency mode. Unit name displays on dispatcher console if an emergency signal is received from another radio on a digital channel. 5.35.1 Declaring an Emergency Call To declare an emergency:
need to hold the button is configured using RPM2. 2. The emergency icon is displayed on the idle display. 1. Press and hold the emergency button on the radio or the speaker microphone. The length of time you For digital channels, the radio transmits the talkgroup or radio ID to the dispatch console and The radio can be programmed to have a dedicated emergency channel, which can be activated from The radio can also be programmed to send an Emergency Alarm in addition to or in place of the receiving radio. analog or digital channels. emergency call (P25 modes). The radio goes through transmit and receive cycles if so configured. Speak into the microphone while the radio is transmitting or press PTT to talk. 3. To exit emergency, power cycle the radio or select EXIT EMERGENCY from the CALL menu. If enabled via programming, you can clear an emergency by pressing the button programmed for the Monitor/Clear function and then the emergency button. 5.35.2 Receiving an Emergency Call When receiving an Emergency Call, an alert tone sounds (if tones are enabled) and an emergency indication is displayed. The unit ID and/or unit name of the unit in emergency is displayed. While the emergency display is active, press PTT to respond to the emergency caller. 64 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.35.3 Stealth Emergency The radio can be programmed with the following emergency behavior:
No audio indications when declaring an emergency. No visual indications when declaring an emergency. Or Or No audio and no visual indications when declaring an emergency. During stealth mode, the radio will not receive any type of call. Once the user presses the PTT button, the radio display and audio return to normal. 5.36 MDC-1200 (ANALOG CONVENTIONAL ONLY) MDC-1200 is a legacy in-band signaling protocol that provides the radio with the ability to transmit and receive a unique PTT ID. This PTT ID can be decoded by receiving radios and displayed as a hexadecimal number or an alias string. In addition, MDC-1200 provides radios with the ability to transmit emergency status to a console. Refer to the MDC-1200 Feature Manual, 14221-7200-6000, for complete instructions on configuring and using this feature. 5.36.1 Normal PTT Operation If MDC signaling on PTT press is enabled using RPM2, the radio transmits an MDC PTT ID message when PTT is pressed. If the Sidetone option is enabled using RPM2, the radio plays a Ready-to-Talk (RTT) tone after the MDC pre-signaling has been transmitted. If MDC signaling on PTT release is enabled (using RPM2), the radio transmits post-call MDC signaling when PTT is released. IF STE is enabled (using RPM2), the MDC post-call signaling is transmitted after STE is sent on PTT release only. MDC post-call signaling is also sent when there is a radio unkey due to Carrier Control Timeout (CCT). Normal CCT alert tones occur prior to unkey. 5.36.2 MDC PTT ID Receive Handling When the radio receives an MDC PTT ID, it searches the MDC ID Alias List for an alias associated with the ID. If one is found, it displays the alias. If none is found, the radio displays the ID in hexadecimal. 5.36.3 Emergency Declaration Emergency declaration is accomplished by the radio generating an MDC Emergency PTT message. An Emergency is considered acknowledged when the radio receives an Ack To Emergency PTT message with an ID which matches its own ID. If Emergency Audio is enabled and the PTT Sidetone option is enabled, the radio plays the Ready-to-Talk tone after the MDC Emergency PTT signaling is transmitted. If an MDC Alert on ACK is enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone when the MDC emergency is acknowledged. If audio tones are enabled, the radio plays an ACK tone if the emergency is not acknowledged within the programmed number of retries. 65 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.37 BEON OPERATION 5.37.1 Overview The BeOn solution is a Voice over IP (VoIP) based, Push-to-Talk (PTT) communications system operating over public or private wireless networks. The solution extends traditional Land Mobile Radio (LMR) services onto the broadband capable third generation (3G) and 4G/LTE cellular networks. This includes the ability to provide highly integrated interoperability services between BeOn users on the cellular network and users of traditional LMR networks. Harris VIDA IP core network switching technology is the foundation for the BeOn application infrastructure. Thus, the application and product suite provide many advanced features not found in competing technologies and provide internetworking of those services between public and private communications networks. XL portables support BeOn operation over Wi-Fi or LTE. It may be necessary to consult one or more of the following when configuring and using BeOn:
BeOn Configuration and Use Feature Manual: 14221-7200-6130 BeOn LAS/LAP Installation and Configuration Manual: 14221-710-3010 Unified Administration System Users Manual: MM24374 RPM2 online help 5.37.2 Wi-Fi Client Selection XL portable radios support up to 24 different Wi-Fi networks configurable via programming, with an option to select one of the configured networks as default. These 24 Wi-Fi networks are considered radio administrator approved and Trusted Wi-
Fi Networks (TWiN) on which the radio can operate. The radio will always join the network configured as the highest priority in the personality when multiple TWiNs are available. To change the selected Wi-Fi network:
1. From the UTILITY menu, select Wi-Fi Client. 2. From here, select a network from the list, add a network, view details about the selected network, or remove the selected network. 66 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5.38 STEALTH MODE For some users, it is important to be able to turn off the radios display lights and side tones, but not the radio traffic. For example, in covert operations, lights and sounds could inadvertently expose an otherwise unobservable radio user. For this purpose, the radio has a Stealth feature that disables the radio display lights, indicator lights, audible alert, and side tones. When Stealth Mode is on, the radio continues to scan the programmed list of Talk Groups and the user can key-up on the selected Talk Group. A button can be programmed via RPM2 to enable/disable Stealth Mode. 67 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6. ADVANCED OPERATIONS 6.1 VIEW/CHANGE PERSONALITIES Personalities contain radio programming information such as frequencies, channels, stations, and talk groups. Up to ten different personalities can be stored in the radio, but only one can be active at a time. 6.1.1 View Personalities 1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. An arrow indicates the currently active personality. 6. The radio displays the plans filename. Personality information appears if the field was filled out using RPM2. 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Select VIEW PLAN INFO to view. 68 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.1.2 Change Active Personality To change the active personality:
1. At main display, press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight PROGRAM and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired personality and press the Menu/Select button. indicates the currently active personality. 5. Press the YES soft key to confirm personality activation. If the personality has a power-up PIN, you are prompted to enter the PIN before activation continues. 6. The IN PROGRESS screen is displayed while plan activation is in progress. 7. If personality is activated, the radio displays PLAN COMPLETE followed by the name of the personality. Press the OK soft key. You cannot activate a personality when the radio is transmitting an emergency. A FAILED message may be displayed for errors such as invalid syntax in the fill or some other invalid parameter. 69 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.2 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA) P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY Situational Awareness is a feature in which the radio receives SA position from other units configured to send the SA packets. The SA display shows the positions of the other radios (units) relative to the radio. To make use of SA, all radios need to have a uniquely programmed Unit ID. To display Situational Awareness Info:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select GPS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press the NEXT soft key. 6. Press the left or right navigation buttons to view the location of each unit. The color of each unit indicates its status as follows. Only one status can be shown at a time and are listed in priority order:
Grey Unselected, no status Red Unselected, In Emergency Orange Unselected, Low Battery Blue Unselected, Scanning Green Selected, no status Green/Red Selected, In Emergency Green/Orange Selected, Low Battery Green/Blue Selected, Scanning 7. GPS of this radio is shown by the center dot as follows:
Green Tracking Orange Last known position Red Searching 70 8. Press the up or down navigation buttons to zoom the display distance of current unit. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 9. Press the OPTIONS soft key. From here, select UNIT INFO to display details about the selected unit, select REFRESH to update information, or select EXIT. 6.3 USER-DEFINED ZONES/SYSTEMS 6.3.1 Command Tactical Zone A Command Tactical Zone is defined at the radio. A Command Tactical Zone is reset when a Personality is activated. To create a Command Tactical Zone:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the ZONE menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight <USER-DEFINED> and press the VIEW ZONE soft key. 4. Press the OPTIONS soft key. 5. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select EDIT ZONE to create a zone or select RENAME ZONE to rename the Command Tactical Zone (up to 16 characters are allowed). 6. Press the left or right navigation buttons to scroll through existing systems. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight desired channel/group. 7. Press the Menu/Select button to add or remove channel/group. 71 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 8. After adding all desired channels/groups, press the BACK soft key. 9. Activate the Command Tactical Zone by selecting the SET ACTIVE soft key on the USER DEFINED screen, or by pressing the Menu/Select button when <USER DEFINED> is highlighted on the Zone menu. 10. After a creating a Command Tactical Zone, select OPTIONS to edit the Command Tactical Zone, delete channels/groups, clear the zone, and rename the zone. 6.3.2 Mixed System Zone Mixed System Zones are defined using RPM2 and cannot be edited on the radio. If a Mixed System Zone is not configured using RPM2, it will not appear on the radio. Up to 250 Mixed System Zones can be defined. You can view details about each channel/group. A user programmable button can be defined to scroll through just the mixed system zones. To view Mixed System Zones:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the ZONE menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired zone (Zones are indicated by the icon) and select VIEW ZONE to view the groups/channels in the zone list. 72 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.4 CH INFO MENU The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu displays information about the currently selected channel. The information displayed varies between conventional and trunked systems. The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display is only available if a Channel Edit Password has been programmed via RPM2. To display channel information:
1. Press while on the idle display. 2. Press the up or down navigation buttons to scroll through the programmed channel settings. CONVENTIONAL OR P25 CHANNELS ONLY:
3. Press the EDIT soft key. 4. Enter the password. You may now select and change the values of the displayed channel parameters. The password remains active until power cycle. Refer to Section 7.2 for more information. 6.5 AUDIO SETTINGS From this menu, you can set audio settings such as speaker mute, noise cancellation, PTT, and tones. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to scroll through available audio settings. Press the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
SPEAKER - Mute or Unmute the speaker audio. NOISE CANCELLATION - Enable or disable noise cancellation. Noise cancellation reduces background noise during transmit. PTT - Enable or disable Push-To-Talk (PTT). Disable PTT to prevent accidental keying, such as when the radio is in a holster or you are getting into a car. TONES - Enable or disable alert tones (see Table 5-6). KEYPAD TONES - Enable or disable keypad tones. When enabled, the radio plays a tone when a button on the keypad is pressed. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit menu. 73 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.6 DISPLAY SETTINGS To change display settings:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY Menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight DISPLAY SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
COLOR SCHEME - Change the color scheme of the top and front displays for optimum viewing in day/night conditions. FRONT BACKLIGHT - Turn front display backlight on, off, momentary, or momentary (off). Momentary (off) is similar to momentary, but the backlight turns off completely and only comes on when the center navigation button is pressed. FRONT BRIGHTNESS - Set brightness level of front display. A level of 0 has same effect as turning off backlight. backlight turns off. ON, or OFF. turns off. AUTO. FRONT TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the front displays TOP BACKLIGHT - Specify how long the top displays backlight will remain lit: MOMENTARY, TOP BRIGHTNESS - Set the brightness level of the top display. A level of 0 turns off top display and indicator (TX/RX) LED. TOP TIMEOUT - Specify how long the radio needs to be inactive before the top displays backlight TOP ORIENTATION - Set orientation of top display to be viewed from radio: FRONT, BACK, or When AUTO is selected, the radio changes the top display to be viewed from back if an external microphone or speaker is attached. Otherwise, the display can be viewed from the front. INDICATOR LED - Toggle the indicator LED ON/OFF. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 74 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.7 GPS SETTINGS The GPS SETTINGS menu item only appears if enabled using RPM2 and the feature is installed. To access GPS settings:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight GPS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons and the Select/Menu button to change settings as desired:
GPS - Enable or disable internal GPS. POSITION INFO - See Section 6.8. DEGREES, or MILS. NAUTICAL. ANGULAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed angular units: CARDINAL, LINEAR UNITS - Set unit of measurement of displayed linear units: STATUTE, METRIC, or POSITION FORMAT- Set format of displayed position information: Latitude/Longitude Decimal Degrees (LAT LONG DD), Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds (LAT/LONG DMS), LAT/LONG DM, Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), or Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). SA OVER NETWORK - When Enabled, the radio sends GPS data to a Harris-supplied PC client using RNDIS networking. 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit the menu. 6.8 POSITION INFO The Position Info screen displays the radio users location information. GPS must be enabled in the GPS Settings (see Section 6.7). To display position info:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 75 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight POSITION INFO and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to scroll through available location information. 6.9 WI-FI The XL portable supports programming via Wi-Fi. Refer to Appendix A for information on configuring Wi-Fi. To enable Wi-Fi programming mode on the radio:
1. Ensure the radio is powered off. 2. Press and hold the bottom side button and PTT button (see Figure 4-1). Figure 6-1: Enabling Wi-Fi 3. Power on the radio. 76 4. The WIFI INSTALL ACTIVE screen is displayed (Figure 6-2). The radio displays DISCONNECTED if not connected to a wireless network or CONNECTED if connected to a wireless network. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Figure 6-2: Wi-Fi Install Active Refer to Section 5.37.2 for more information about Wi-Fi Client selection. 6.10 BLUETOOTH The BLUETOOTH menu item only appears if enabled using RPM2 and if the feature is installed. 6.10.1 Enable Bluetooth To enable Bluetooth:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight ENABLED and press the Menu/Select button to toggle YES/NO. Or A button or switch can be programmed to enable/disable Bluetooth. 77 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.10.2 Pair Devices To pair devices:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight BLUETOOTH and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight PAIRING MGMT and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Make sure device being paired is powered on and has discovery mode enabled to pair with the radio. If no devices are found and Bluetooth is enabled, only the ADD NEW soft key is available. If devices are paired, the OPTIONS soft key appears. 6. Press the ADD NEW soft key to select a device to pair. 7. A list of available Bluetooth devices appears. 8. Press the REFRESH soft key to refresh the device list if the desired device does not appear. 9. Press the up or down navigation buttons highlight the desired device and press the PAIR softkey. 10. Pairing progress is displayed. For Bluetooth 2.0 devices, a pin code screen appears. Enter the pin code and select OK. For Bluetooth 2.1 devices, a PASSKEY accept/deny screen appears. Select ACCEPT. Accept the passkey on the Bluetooth 2.1 device as well. 78 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 11. A PAIRING COMPLETE message appears when pairing is complete. Select OK. The paired device is then displayed in the PAIRED DEVICES list. 6.10.3 Reconnecting to Covert Bluetooth Microphone 12082-0684-01 When powering down, the radio and the microphone should be turned off one at a time, allowing the first device to completely shut down before turning off the second device. Power Up Sequence:
1. Power up the XL radio. Wait for power up to complete. 2. Power up covert microphone 12082-0684-01. 3. Wait for Bluetooth connection as indicated by the LED. When connected, the LED is on and blue. 4. If the microphone LED indicates Idle or does not connect, press and release the PTT button. 6.10.4 Pair with the SCOTT EPIC 3 Radio Direct Interface (RDI) Voice Amplifier The RDI Voice Amplifier enhances SCBA voice intelligibility when connected to the XL Portable via Bluetooth. To turn the amplifier on and place into pairing mode:
1. Press and hold the power button until the LED changes from green to red. This happens in about four
(4) seconds. 2. Release the power button. 3. The LED starts blinking indicating the amp is in pairing mode. 4. Ensure the LED is the same color blinking on and off indicating pairing mode. The amp will timeout of pairing mode quickly and the blinking will stop. If this happens before successful pairing, power off and restart from Step 1. 5. If the LED is blinking between light red and dark red, then the amp is in programming mode. If you try to pair with the amplifier in this mode, it will identify itself as an RI version. Turn off power and restart from step 1. 79 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.11 CLOCK SETTINGS To view/change clock settings:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight CLOCK SETTINGS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons and Menu/Select button to change settings as desired:
TIME FORMAT- Set 12 or 24-hour time display format. TIME ZONE - Set time zone relative to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). 5. Press the BACK soft key to exit. 6.12 BATTERY INFO To display battery information:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight MAINTENANCE and press the Menu/Select 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight BATTERY INFO and press the Menu/Select button. button. 80 5. Battery information is displayed (state, voltage, capacity, chemistry, etc.). 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Use only Harris approved batteries. Injury could occur from using an incorrect battery. 6.13 SELECT LANGUAGE To change the language displayed by the radio:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the UTILITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight CHANGE LANGUAGE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired language and press the Menu/Select button. 6.14 SET UP SCAN To access the scan lists:
These procedures are used to set up the scan list, home channels, and priority channels. 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. Refer to the following sections. 81 WARNING 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M When using Preemptive Priority Scan, the frequencies in the list need to be unique. 6.14.1 Default, Priority 1, and Priority 2 Channels 6.14.1.1 Default Channel This is the currently selected channel and is the channel you transmit on by default when you press PTT while the radio is actively scanning and is not responding to a just received call. Responding to a call the radio just received while scanning is called hang time. If hang time is set to 0 using RPM2, the radio always transmits on the default channel in scan. 6.14.1.2 Priority 1 Channel This channel will be scanned more often than other channels in the list and will be scanned in between every other channel in the scan list. An example scan sequence would be P1 (priority 1), C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, etc. In addition, the priority channel is scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P1, the radio drops C3 and switches to P1. 6.14.1.3 Priority 2 Channel This channel is also scanned more often than others. An example scan sequence is P1, C2, P1, C3, P1, C4, P2, C5, P1, C6, P1, C7, P1, C8, P2, C9, etc. In addition, this channel is scanned even while actively receiving on a non-priority channel. For example, if the radio is actively receiving on C3 and activity is detected on P2, the radio drops C3 and switches to P2. Additionally, activity on P1 can also preempt P2, but P2 cannot preempt P1. 6.14.2 Trunked/Conventional Scanning Trunked/conventional scanning adds the ability to scan multiple conventional and P25 conventional channels while still maintaining trunked radio operation. The radio can scan a conventional scan list while still receiving a trunked control channel and receiving trunked calls. Selection of which conventional scan list is associated with a given trunked system is done using RPM2 and cannot be changed on the radio. However, a user with access to the necessary menu layout (see Section 5.9) can edit the scan list members (both trunked groups and conventional channels on the selected Conventional Priority System). As the number of conventional channels being scanned increases, the time between scanning each channel increases (roughly 250 milliseconds per channel), with the consequent increase in the number of calls that will late-enter. To avoid missing calls, it is recommended to keep the number of conventional channels being scanned to eight (8) or fewer. The trunking site must have roaming set to Enhanced CC. 82 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.14.3 Vote Scan (Analog and P25 Conventional Only) If vote scan is enabled via RPM2, the radio automatically selects the strongest signal ensuring that the best audio quality is delivered to the user. If vote scan is enabled, the radio is always scanning. You cannot stop scanning, start normal scanning, or monitor the channel. The scanning icon on the idle screen indicates that the radio is vote scanning versus, regular scanning. If talkaround is enabled, Vote Scan is disabled until talkaround is disabled again. Depending on the scan list options selected via RPM2, you may be able to add or remove channels/groups from the scan list. 6.14.4 Edit Scan List To edit the scan list:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select SCAN LISTS. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the scan list and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight channel/group. 6. Select OPTIONS. 7. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select ADD CHAN/DELETE CHAN, SET PRI1, SET PRI2, REMOVE PRI, or NUISANCE/ADD BACK. 83 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M When a channel is not grayed out in the list, DELETE CHAN appears. When a channel/group is grayed out (not in list), ADD CHAN appears. 8. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle selection. 6.14.5 Set or Remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 Channels Priority channels are scanned more often than non-priority channels. Note that P1 and P2 can only be set if configured as Keypad and the scan list is not set to Fixed using RPM2. To set or remove priority 1 and priority 2 channels:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SCAN LISTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired scan list and press the Menu/Select button. 5. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired channel/group. 6. Select OPTIONS. 7. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SET PRI1 or SET PRI2 and press the Menu/Select button. A Priority 1 channel appears with a P1; a Priority 2 channel appears with a P2. 8. Select REMOVE PRI to remove priority. 84 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.14.6 Custom Scan Lists The Mixed Zone Scan (MZS) feature gives the user the capability to scan based on a custom scan list that is assigned at the system level. The Custom Scan (CS) list can contain System and Channel/Group configurations across P25 Trunked, P25 Conventional, and Analog Systems. When a Custom Scan List is assigned to a P25T system, the radio can scan P25T, P25C and Analog systems. When assigned to a P25C or Analog system, the radio only scans conventional channels. MZS also gives the user the capability to scan beyond the selected system group set. P25T Scan When a custom scan list is assigned to a P25T system, the user can scan P25T, P25C, and Analog groups/channels. All P25T systems must have the same WACN, System ID, and Unit ID to be added to the custom scan list. If P25C and/or analog channels are added to the custom scan list, the radio will scan them using the Trunked/Conventional scan feature described in section 6.14.2, and will override any other conventional scan list that may have been programmed using RPM2. P25C and Analog Scan When a custom scan list is assigned to a P25C or Analog System, the user can scan P25C and Analog channels. P25T systems are ignored. Custom scan list can be created using RPM2 or at the radio. The radio supports up to 10 Custom Scan lists, with up to 100 channels/groups in each. 6.14.6.1 Create Custom Scan List To create a custom scan list at the radio:
1. Press the Menu/Select button. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight ASSIGNED CUSTOM LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the OPTIONS softkey. 5. Select ADD SCAN LIST. 85 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the newly added scan list and press the VIEW/EDIT soft key. 7. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the desired system. 8. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired group/channel and press the OPTIONS softkey. From here, you can add/delete channels from the scan list and set/remove Priority 1 and Priority 2 channels. When a custom scan list is selected, that list is scanned any time scanning is enabled for any Trunked, conventional, or P25 Conventional system. To scan only the channels assigned to a system, custom scanning must be turned off. 6.14.7 Wide Area System Scan (P25 Trunked and EDACS) Wide Area System Scan (WASCAN) causes the radio to roam across mobile systems when the currently selected system's control channel is lost. The radio will scan the control channels of other systems. To enable/disable Wide Area System Scan:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SITE ROAMING and press the Menu/Select button to toggle Wide Area System Scan ENABLED/DISABLED. 4. Select BACK to exit the scan menu. 86 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.14.8 Site Lock The Site Lock feature provides a list of available, adjacent sites that the user can lock the radio to. This restricts the radio from roaming between sites. Up to 512 sites can be programmed to the radio. Site Lock is only supported on P25 Trunked Systems with Enhanced CC Scan enabled. A button on the radio can be programmed to access the Site Alias list (see Section 7.4). 1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SCAN menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight SITE ALIAS. 4. Press the Menu/Select button to display the list of available sites. If a Site Alias is programmed for the available site(s), it is displayed here. Otherwise, the system name is displayed. 5. From the OPTIONS menu, select LOCK SITE or SWITCH SITE. 87 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.15 RADIO STATUS The status feature allows the radio user to send a status condition to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 status conditions programmed into the radio. For each status defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio status (see Section 7.4). To send a radio status:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight RADIO STATUS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select desired status. 88 NOTE 6.16 RADIO MESSAGE The message feature is used to send a message to the site without making a voice call. There can be up to 10 messages programmed into the radio. For each message defined, there is an ID and an alphanumeric name. The ID is sent to the site and the alphanumeric name appears on the radio display when the ID corresponds with the information programmed at the site. 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M A button on the radio can be programmed to send a radio message (see Section 7.4). To send a radio message:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight RADIO MESSAGE and press the Menu/Select 4. Use the up or down navigation buttons and the Menu/Select button to highlight and select the desired button. message. 89 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.17 RADIO TEXTLINK Radio TextLink provides short text messaging functionality for radios. Due to the difficulty of entering text messages on a radio, predefined "canned" messages and predefined replies can be stored in the radio. To facilitate sending messages where information must be provided at send time, text message forms can also be stored in the radio. A form can contain up to four (4) text prompts, for which the operator enters alphanumeric values before sending the message. 6.17.1 Radio TextLink Messages To send a canned Radio TextLink message:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight TEXTLINK MESSAGES and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the desired message. Press the Menu/Select button to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 6.17.2 Radio TextLink Forms Form messages are displayed and stored in the radio as a message in which each field to be filled is indicated by a question mark (?) followed by one or more asterisks (*). The number of asterisks indicates the maximum number of alphanumeric characters allowed for that field. To send a Radio TextLink form:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight TEXTLINK FORMS and press the Menu/Select button. 90 4. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the desired message and press the Menu/Select 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M button. 5. Enter text into blank field(s) (up to eight alphanumeric characters) and press the NEXT soft key. 6. Select SEND to send the message. Select CHG CALLEE to change the destination for the message. Select TOD QUERY to get the time of day. 6.17.3 View Received Messages When the icon appears on the idle display, there are Radio TextLink messages waiting to be read. To view received Radio TextLink messages:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight TEXTLINK MAILBOX and press the Menu/Select button. From the mailbox, select OPTIONS to delete messages, view details of messages, and reply to messages. 91 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.18 FAULTS/ALERTS is displayed on the idle display when there is a fault. To view and clear faults/alerts:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the MESSAGES menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight FAULTS/ALERTS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Fault messages are displayed. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired fault. Press the OPTIONS soft key delete faults. Press the DETAILS soft key to view details for the highlighted fault. Possible faults include:
BATTERY FAULT- Replace battery. EEPROM FAULT - Contact Harris. RF FAULT - Contact Harris. OVERCURRENT - Check antenna and antenna connection. Try replacing antenna. CHANNEL FAULT - Channel frequency programmed is not valid for this radio. INVALID SYSTEM - Feature not installed. 5. If you view but do not delete the fault, the alert icon goes away on the idle display. Contact Harris for assistance with diagnosing a fault. 92 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.19 TONE ENCODE Tone Encode is a generic tone encoding scheme for call identification when transmitting on a conventional system. It supports generic user-definable tone encode (up to 15 tones), Type 99 (up to 2 tones) and 5/1 Tone (up to 5 tones) encoding formats. Tone encoding schemes are used to transmit calls to one or more target radios that have been programmed with the correct tone decode sequence. When the receiving radio detects its tone decode sequence, it unmutes on the call. To select a Tone Encode option:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the CALL menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight TONE ENCODE and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Select the desired Tone Encode option from the list. 6.20 ENCRYPTION 6.20.1 Create and Load Keys Refer to the following documentation for advanced programming and setup instructions:
Harris OTAR Overview Manual - MM-008069-001 Network Key Manager Installation and Configuration Manual - MM-008070-001 Harris UAS Key Management Application Manual - MM-008068-001 Harris Key Manager Key Admin Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019423 Harris Key Manager Key Loader Overview and Operation Manual - MM1000019424 Motorola KVL 3000 Plus Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide Motorola KVL 4000 Key Variable Loader (KVL) User's Guide 93 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.20.2 Zeroize Keys from Radio It may be necessary to remove keys because of compromise or expiration. To zeroize keys from the radio:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons highlight ZEROIZE KEYS and press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the YES softkey to remove the keys. This will also remove the keysets. 6.20.3 Protected Keys The Protected Keys feature transfers P25 Voice Keys, from Harris Key Loader to the radio, that have been wrapped (AES) or encrypted (DES) with Key Protection Keys (KPKs). KPKs are nothing more than unprotected Key Encryption Keys (KEKs). The KPKs need to be loaded into the radio before the Protected Keys are loaded. Once loaded into the radio, the KPKs are used to unwrap (AES) or decrypt (DES) the Protected Keys. 6.20.4 Global Encryption Global Encryption can be enabled when encryption keys are loaded on the radio and the selected Zone/System is encrypted. When Global Encryption is enabled on the radio, a Global Key is used for all encrypted transmissions until:
Global Encryption is disabled. A new personality is activated. The active keyset is changed. The system is changed. Global Encryption behavior is available on all channels that support encrypted communications. To enable Global Encryption and/or change Global Encryption Key:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 94 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight GLOBAL ENCRYPTION. Press the Menu/Select button. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the desired Global Key and press the Menu/Select button to enable Global Encryption. 5. To change the selected global key, press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight GLOBAL KEY on the SECURITY menu. Press the Menu/Select key. 6. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight the global key and press the Menu/Select button. 7. RPM2 allows Key Numbers to be given Key Names. 8. The optional global key icon is displayed on the main display. 6.20.5 Select Keyset To select a keyset:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select ACTIVE KEYSET. Press the Menu/Select button to toggle to the inactive keyset. 95 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.20.6 View Key List To view the key list:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select KEY LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. The available key lists are displayed. 6.20.7 Delete Individual Keys To delete individual keys from a keyset:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select KEY LIST and press the Menu/Select button. 4. The available key lists are displayed. 5. Select the desired keyset and press the Menu/Select button to display the individual keys. Highlight the desired key and press the Delete softkey. 96 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 6.20.8 OTAR Configuration OTAR is the over-the-air-rekeying from a KMF and must be enabled for the digital only channel using RPM2. For OTAR operation, the appropriate KEKs must be loaded into the radio using the Harris Key Loader or a KVL device. The KMF Configuration must include the RSI of the KMF and the appropriate Message Number Period. To enable OTAR and request rekey:
1. Press the Menu/Select button to access the main menu. 2. Press the left or right navigation buttons to display the SECURITY menu. 3. Press the up or down navigation buttons to highlight OTAR and press the Menu/Select button to toggle ENABLED/DISABLED. 4. Press the up or down navigation buttons to select OTAR REKEY and press the Menu/Select button to request that the KMF updates the keys in the radio. OTAR REKEY is only enabled if the radio has successfully registered for data operations. If enabled via programming, the radio plays an audible confirmation tone to indicate successful OTAR rekey. 6.21 P25 CONVENTIONAL FALLBACK When P25 Conventional Fallback is enabled, a P25 trunking site responds to failures by allowing one or more channels to operate as conventional repeaters. Terminals which are properly configured can then communicate using the conventional P25 channel(s). The radio provides an audible and visual indication when operating in P25 Conventional Fallback. 97 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 7. PROGRAMMING This section provides information on front panel programming. Programming can also be accomplished by creating a plan using a computer with RPM2 installed. 7.1 PROGRAMMING VIA RPM2 Radio Personality Manager2 (RPM2) is used to program the XL portable. With RPM2, you can fully program the radio using cable 12082-0410-A1. Removing power during radio programming or programming the radio with low battery power could corrupt installation of firmware. Ensure that the radio is turned off before connecting the programming cable. After the cable is connected, then power on the radio. 7.2 EDIT CHANNEL (ANALOG AND P25 CONVENTIONAL ONLY) Channels can be edited from the Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display. Most of the displayed channel parameters can be modified here. Channel edits persist across a power cycle. Loading a personality clears any channel edits. Available parameters vary depending on whether the channel is a P25 or analog channel. The Channel Information (CH INFO) menu display is only available if a Channel Edit Password has been programmed via RPM2. To edit a channel:
1. From the main display, press to access the CH INFO screen. 2. Press the up or down navigation buttons to scroll through the programmed channel settings. 3. Press the EDIT soft key. cycle the radio. Only authorized users should attempt channel editing. 4. Enter the password programmed via RPM2. You do not have to re-enter the password until you power 98 CAUTION NOTE CAUTION 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. Press the ENTER soft key. 6. Highlight and select the parameter to edit. For P25 channels, modify remaining channel settings:
CHANNEL NAME - The Channel Name cannot be changed from this screen; RPM2 is required to change the Channel Name. RX FREQUENCY - Receive frequency. Note that if the new frequency is invalid, the display reverts to the old frequency (Table 7-1). TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER - Transmit power. Toggle between LOW and HIGH. TALKGROUP - Select a talkgroup for the channel. Talkgroup name cannot be set here. RX NAC - Network Access Code (NAC) radio uses for Normal squelch in receive. TX NAC - NAC radio transmits to break Normal squelch on receiving radio. P25 SQUELCH - Select type the radio uses in receive. Select NORMAL, SELECTIVE, or MONITOR. RX CHAN GUARD Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. For a digital channel, the RX CHAN GUARD is used to receive from a Conventional analog channel that is on the same frequency and uses the selected Channel Guard. RX CODE - Code radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. RX TONE - Tone radio looks to unmute the speaker on the receiving radio when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. 7. For analog channel, modify remaining channel settings:
CHANNEL NAME - The Channel Name cannot be changed from this screen; RPM2 is required to change the Channel Name. TX FREQUENCY - Transmit frequency. TX POWER - Transmit power. Toggle between HIGH and LOW. RX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in receive. Select Noise, CTCSS, or CDCSS. RX TONE - Tone radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CTCSS. RX CODE - Code radio uses to break selective squelch on receiving radio. This is available when RX squelch is set to CDCSS. RX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 5.23. 99 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TX CHAN GUARD - Squelch type radio uses in transmit. Select None, CTCSS, or CDCSS. TX TONE - Tone sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CTCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CODE - Code sent by transmitting radio to allow receiving radio to unmute when CDCSS squelch is used in conventional mode. TX CHAN GUARD is not available on this screen if it was enabled from the CALL menu as per Section 5.23. 8. An asterisk is displayed in front of the CHANNEL label on the main display when a channel has been edited. The asterisk is NOT shown for TX Power or Talkgroup changes. When the only item edited is the TX or RX CHAN GUARD values, and then CHAN GUARD edit is Disabled, the asterisk goes away and the channel is no longer considered edited. This is the only editable item for which this is true. Table 7-1: Valid Frequency Ranges INTERNATIONAL
(NON-REBANDED) 136 - 174 MHz 378 - 522 MHz 763 - 776 MHz 793 - 806 MHz 806 - 825 MHz 851 - 870 MHz US
(REBANDED) 136 - 174 MHz 378-522 MHz 768 - 776 MHz 798 - 806 MHz 806 -8 16 MHz 851 - 861 MHz FREQUENCY RESOLUTION 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 2500, 5000, or 6250 Hz 6250 kHz 6250 kHz 6250 kHz 6250 kHz 7.3 OTAP The radio supports Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) via ProFile Manager. RPM2 creates, modifies and stores personality information while ProFile Manager delivers the personality over the network to the desired radios. ProFile Manager also contains the ability to read personality information over-the-air and save the files, so that RPM2 can modify the information if necessary. You can interrupt the programming process, if necessary, by depressing the Push-to-Talk (PTT) button or declaring an emergency. Once a radio personality update is successfully completed, the radio automatically resets itself, switches to the new personality, and returns to normal operation. For more information on using ProFile Manager, refer to software release notes AE/LZT 123 3263/1. 100 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 7.4 PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS AND SWITCHES 7.4.1 Programmable Buttons Press the down navigation button while on the main display to view the functions assigned to the programmable buttons. The programmable buttons are programmed using RPM2. A delay of 0 to 10 seconds can be defined using RPM2 for the programmable buttons. Table 7-2 lists and describes the functions that can be programmed to the buttons:
Table 7-2: Programmable Button Options DESCRIPTION FUNCTION No Operation Adjust Squelch Allows the user to adjust the analog squelch level. Audio Playback Accesses the AUDIO PLAYBACK menu. See Section 5.29. Bluetooth Enable/Disable Enable/disable Bluetooth. See Section 6.10. Channel Guard Override Allow user to pick a different Channel Guard setting for the current channel. Channel/Group Bank Select Select the channel/group bank. If your system has more than 64 channels, this allows you to select a channel group with channels 65 to 127, 128 to 191, etc. Direct System/Zone Entry Allow user to select system/zone. Drop Call Drop or terminate any group call that the radio receives. Editable Preset When this button is pressed and held for four (4) seconds, the radio saves the currently selected system/group or zone/channel to this button. When this button is pressed and released in less than four (4) seconds, the radio changes to the user-saved system/group or zone/channel if already saved by the user. If system/group or zone/channel is not configured for this button, when user defined preset button is pressed and released in less than four (4) seconds, the radio displays Preset Empty. Fixed Preset Flashlight Mode When this button is pressed and released, the radio changes to the system/group or zone/channel specified in RPM2. Press and hold to turn on the front and top display backlights. Release the button to turn off both displays. Front Backlight Toggles front displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. GPS SA Info Display GPS Situational Awareness (SA) screen. Goes to home channel. Initiate an Individual Call. Home Individual Call Lock Keypad Monitor/Clear OTAR Rekey Phone Call Profile Toggle Monitor Toggle Toggles Monitor On/Off. Locks the DTMF keypad, programmable function keys and navigation keys. Temporarily turn off selected squelch to monitor for traffic that may not normally break squelch. Also, press this button followed by the emergency button to clear an emergency. Nuisance Delete Performs a Nuisance Delete. See Section 5.33 for more information. Numeric Channel Entry Allows number channel entry. Initiate an OTAR rekey. See Section 6.20.7. Initiate a telephone interconnect call. See Section 5.27. Toggles between the currently active profile (if one has been selected) and no profile. 101 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Scan Enable Enable/disable scan. Secure Enable Toggle Toggles Encryption Mode On/Off. See Sections 5.21 and 6.20 for information on Encryption. Send Message Sends a preconfigured message. See Section 6.16 for more information. Send Status Site Alias Site Roaming Sends a preconfigured status. See Section 6.15 for more information. Accesses the Site Alias list. See Section 6.14.8 for more information. Enable/disable Site roaming. Site Roaming allows the radio to roam to another site. Speaker Mute Toggle Toggles Speaker Muted/Unmuted. System Down Scrolls down through the list of available systems, stopping when the end of the list is reached. System Down Wrap Scrolls down through the list of available systems, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. System Up Scrolls up through the list of available systems, stopping at the top of the list. System Up Wrap Talkaround Top Backlight Top Orient Scrolls up through the list of available systems, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. Toggles talkaround On/Off. See Section 5.24. Toggles the top displays backlight On/Off/Momentary. Toggles Top Display Front/Back. TX Power High/Low Toggle TX Power between LOW and HIGH. User Login Allows the user to login. This is only enabled on P25 Trunked systems that support Advanced P25 User Login. See Section 5.5.1. Voice Announce Enable/disable Voice Annunciation. See Section 5.20. Zone Down Zone Down Wrap Zone Up Zone Up Wrap Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping when the end of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls down through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the top when the bottom of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, stopping at the top of the list. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. Scrolls up through the list of available mixed system zones, wrapping to the end when the beginning of the list is reached. If no mixed system zones are defined, or there is only one, the user will hear a deny tone when the button is pressed. 7.4.2 Programmable A/B (/O) Switch The programmable A/B switch can be programmed for multiple functions, including:
Table 7-3: Programmable /O Switch Options FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Clear/Secure Enable/disable encryption. Scan Turn scan operation on/off. Talkaround Enable/disable talkaround. Keypad Lock/Unlock Locks/unlocks the keypad. TX Enable/Disable Enable/disable transmit. Bluetooth Enable/disable Bluetooth. 102 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 7.4.3 Programmable A/B/C/D Switch Sections 7.4.3.1 and 7.4.3.2 describe the various functions that can be programmed to the A/B/C/D switch. 7.4.3.1 Single-Instance Features Single-instance features can only be assigned to one switch position at a time. If one of these features is programmed to the A/B/C/D switch, other means of accessing that feature are disabled (i.e., two-position switch, programmable buttons, call menu, etc.). Table 7-4: Single-Instance Features FUNCTION DESCRIPTION No Function Talkaround Scan Bluetooth No function programmed to switch. See Section 5.24. Enables scanning. Enable Bluetooth. Sets transmission power level to High. Changing to a Tx Power High position overrides the current personality or user TX Power High setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power High position restores the personality-configured Tx Sets transmission power level to Low. Changing to a Tx Power Low position overrides the current personality or user TX Power Low setting for TX Power. Changing from a Tx Power Low position restores the personality-configured Tx Power Level. Power Level. Keypad Lock Locks DTMF, programmable, and navigation soft keys. Radio Lock Channel Bank When set, prevents the radio software from responding to the following physical inputs on the radio:
Volume Knob Change (power off is not prevented) Channel Knob Side User-Programmable Buttons and Keypad (DTMF, programmable, and 2-Position Switch navigation/soft keys) Exception is the emergency button and if any key is programmed for Monitor/Clear, it can be used with the emergency button to clear emergency, if so programmed. Selects channels 1-16 in position A; 17-32 in position B; 33-48 in position C; and 49-64 in position D. If Channel Bank is selected for any single position, all 4 positions (A, B, C, and D) will be set to Channel Bank. 103 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 7.4.3.2 Indexed Features These features can be assigned to any number of positions if each index value selected for it is unique across multiple assignments of the same feature; for example, you cannot assign a Zone with an index (e.g., ZONE A) to both positions A and B. Table 7-5: Indexed Features FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Zone Selection System Selection Sets to the Zone index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed zone assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that zone. This has the resulting effects:
This sets the channel knob to be zone-based system/channel selection just like selecting a zone from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the Zone selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the zone where the switch assignment is set. When changing away from a Zone assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. Sets to the System index value. When setting the A/B/C/D switch to an indexed System assigned position, the radio sets, but does not hold, that System. This has the resulting effects:
This sets the channel knob to be system-based channel selection, just like selecting a system from the main Zone menu or ramping up/down using the side user-programmable buttons. If a user then changes to a different system or zone via another method (menu, button, etc.), it will override the System selection switch setting accordingly and not require it to remain in the system where the switch assignment is set. When changing away from a System assigned position, no actions/changes will be taken by the radio. 7.5 PROGRAMMABLE ICONS 7.5.1 Top Display The top display has space for up to seven configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:
Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Scan/Vote Scan enabled Talkaround enabled Emergency mode active The radio can be programmed to change the color of the top display backlight relative to the currently selected channel/group. The backlight remains the color programmed for the currently selected channel/group except during an emergency, in which case the color changes to orange. 104 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 7.5.2 Front Display The front display has space for up to 10 configurable icons, which can be programmed to display any of the following:
Blank Signal Strength Battery Status Bluetooth enabled Encryption enabled Global Encryption Talkaround enabled TX Disabled Tones Disabled PTT Disabled Speaker Muted Monitor GPS Status VDOC Failsoft Alert(s) RX Mail Data Status (TX/RX) Noise Cancellation Enabled Type 99 Enabled Conventional Site Status (Unregistered/Registered) OTAR Status (Disabled, Registering, Registered, Rekeying) TX Power level (Low/High/RX Only) 105 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 8. REFERENCE 8.1 MARINE FREQUENCIES Refer to Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies for a list of maritime frequencies per United States Coast Guard
(USCG), National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), and Canadian Department Fisheries and Oceans, August 2009:
United States (US) International (Intl) Canada (CA) Table 8-1: Marine Frequencies US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) CHANNEL USAGE T: 156.05 R: 160.65 T: 160.65 R: 156.05 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 1a T/R:
156.05 T/R:
156.05 US: Port Operations and Commercial, Vessel Traffic Service (VTS). New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 4a T/R:
156.20 T/R:
156.20 Canada: Department Fisheries Ocean (DFO)/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. Commercial fishing in east coast area International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations or VTS in Houston, New Orleans and Seattle areas. US: Intership Safety International: Intership Canada: May be used for search and rescue communications between ships and aircraft. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations T: 156.35 R: 160.95 T: 160.95 R: 156.35 7a 8 T/R:
156.35 T/R:
156.40 T/R:
156.35 T/R:
156.40 US: Commercial T/R:
156.45 T/R:
156.45 9 9 9 US: Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Also assigned for intership in the Lake Winnipeg area. US: Boater Calling. Commercial and Non-Commercial. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. T: 156.10 R: 160.70 T: 160.70 R: 156.10 T: 156.15 R: 160.75 T: 160.75 R: 156.15 T: 156.20 R: 160.80 T: 160.80 R: 156.20 T: 156.25 R: 160.85 T: 160.85 R: 156.25 T/R:
156.25 T/R:
156.30 T/R:
156.25 T/R:
156.30 1 2 3 7a 8 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 5a 5a 6 6 6 106 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) T/R:
156.50 T/R:
156.50 10 10 10 CHANNEL USAGE US: Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial - British Columbia coast area. May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. 11 11 11 T/R:
156.55 T/R:
156.55 12 12 12 T/R:
156.60 T/R:
156.60 T/R:
156.65 T/R:
156.65 13 13 13 US: Commercial. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. US: Intership Navigation Safety (Bridge-to-bridge). Ships >20m length maintain a listening watch on this channel in US waters. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. 14 14 14 T/R:
156.70 T/R:
156.70 US: Port Operations. VTS in selected areas. International: Port Operations Canada: VTS - British Columbia coast area. Also used for pilotage purposes. T/R:
156.75 T/R:
156.75 15 15 15 T/R:
156.80 T/R:
156.80 16 16 16 T/R:
156.85 T/R:
156.85 17 17 17 US: Environmental (Receive only). Used by Class C Emergency Position-
Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRBs). International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1-watt maximum power. May also be used for on-
board communications. US: International Distress, Safety and Calling. Ships required to carry radio, US Coast Guard (USCG), and most coast stations maintain a listening watch on this channel. International: International Distress, Safety and Calling Canada: International Distress, Safety and Calling US: State Control International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Port operations and Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. All operations limited to 1-watt maximum power. May also be used for on-
board communications. T: 156.90 R: 161.50 T: 161.50 R: 156.90 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 18a T/R:
156.90 T/R:
156.90 US: Commercial Canada: Towing - British Columbia coast area. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 18a 19a 18 19 T: 156.95 R: 161.55*
T: 161.55*
R: 156.95 T/R:
156.95 19a T/R:
156.95 US: Commercial Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard. Pacific Pilots - British Columbia coast area. 20 20 20 T: 157.00 R: 161.60 T: 161.60 R: 157.00 US: Port Operations (Duplex) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Port operations only with 1-watt maximum power. 107 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) CHANNEL USAGE 20a 21a T/R:
157.00 T/R:
157.00 US: Port Operations 21 T: 157.05 R: 161.65*
T: 161.65*
R: 157.05 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 21a T/R:
157.05
21b T/R:
157.05 T/R:
161.65 US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only. 22 T: 157.10 R: 161.70 T: 161.70 R: 157.10 22a 22a T/R:
157.10 T/R:
157.10 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Coast Guard Liaison and Maritime Safety Information Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced on channel 16. Canada: For communications between Canadian Coast Guard and non-
Canadian Coast Guard stations only. 23 23 T: 157.15 R: 161.75 T: 161.75 R: 157.15 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 23a T/R:
157.15
23b T/R:
157.15 T/R:
161.75 US: US Coast Guard only Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. 24 24 24 T: 157.20 R: 161.80 T: 161.80 R: 157.20 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 25 25 25 T: 157.25 R: 161.85 T: 161.85 R: 157.25 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: Also assigned for operations in the Lake Winnipeg area. 25b T/R:
161.85 26 26 26 T: 157.30 R: 161.90 T: 161.90 R: 157.30 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 27 27 27 T: 157.35 R: 161.95 T: 161.95 R: 157.35 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 28 28 28 T: 157.40 R: 162.00 T: 162.00 R: 157.40 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 28b
T/R:
162.00 60 60 T: 156.025 R: 160.625 T: 160.625 R: 156.025 T: 156.075 R: 160.675 T: 160.675 R: 156.075 Canada: Continuous Marine Broadcast (CMB) service. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 61a 61a T/R:
156.075 T/R:
156.075 Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. T: 156.125 R: 160.725 T: 160.725 R: 156.125 62a T/R:
156.125 T/R:
156.125 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard only in British Columbia coast area. 61 62 108 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) 63 T: 156.175 R: 160.775 T: 160.775 R: 156.175 CHANNEL USAGE International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations T/R:
156.175 63a T/R:
156.175 US: Port Operations and Commercial, VTS. New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area. Canada: Tow Boats - British Columbia coast area. 64 64 T: 156.225 R: 160.825 T: 160.825 R: 156.225 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 64a T/R:
156.225 T/R:
156.225 Canada: Commercial fishing only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 63a 64a 65 T: 156.275 R: 160.875 T: 160.875 R: 156.225 T/R:
156.275 T/R:
156.275 65a 65a 66 T: 156.325 R: 160.925 T: 160.925 R: 156.325 66a 66a T/R:
156.325 T/R:
156.325 T/R:
156.375 T/R:
156.375 67 67 67 US: Port Operations Canada: Search and rescue and antipollution operations on the Great Lakes. Towing on the Pacific Coast. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River areas with 1-watt maximum power. Intership in inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations US: Port Operations Canada: Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1-watt maximum power. 1-watt marina channel - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-bridge communications in lower Miss. River. Intership only. International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. 68 68 68 T/R:
156.425 T/R:
156.425 69 69 69 T/R:
156.475 T/R:
156.475 US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: For marinas, yacht clubs and pleasure craft. US: Non-Commercial International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: Commercial fishing only - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. 70 70 70 T/R:
156.525 T/R:
156.525 US: Digital Selective Calling (voice communications not allowed) International: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling Canada: Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling 71 71 71 T/R:
156.575 T/R:
156.575 T/R:
156.625 T/R:
156.625 72 72 72 US: Non-Commercial International: Port Operations Canada: Ship Movement - British Columbia coast area. Marinas and yacht clubs - east coast and on Lake Winnipeg. US: Non-Commercial (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: May be used to communicate with aircraft and helicopters in predominantly maritime support operations. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area 109 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) T/R:
156.675 T/R:
156.675 73 73 73 CHANNEL USAGE US: Port Operations International: Intership, Port Operations Canada: May also be used for communications with aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue and antipollution operations. Commercial fishing only in east coast and inland Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta areas. 74 74 74 T/R:
156.725 T/R:
156.725 US: Port Operations International: Port Operations Canada: VTS and Ship Movement British Columbia coast area. 75 75 75 T/R:
156.775 T/R:
156.775 76 76 76 T/R:
156.825 T/R:
156.825 T/R:
156.875 T/R:
156.875 77 77 77 International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. International: Port Operations Canada: Simplex port operation, ship movement and navigation related communication only. 1 watt maximum. US: Port Operations (Intership only) International: Intership Canada: Pilotage - British Columbia coast area; 25 watts. Port operations only in the St. Lawrence River/Great Lakes areas with 1-watt maximum power. T: 156.925 R: 161.525 T: 161.525 R: 156.925 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 78a T/R:
156.925 T/R:
156.925 US: Non-Commercial Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. T: 156.975 R: 161.575 T: 161.575 R: 156.975 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 79a T/R:
156.975 T/R:
156.975 US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. T: 157.025 R: 161.625 T: 161.625 R: 157.025 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 80a T/R:
157.025 T/R:
157.025 US: Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only Canada: Fishing Industry - British Columbia coast area. T: 157.075 R: 161.675 T: 161.675 R: 157.075 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 81a T/R:
157.075 T/R:
157.075 US: US Government only - Environmental protection operations Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. T: 157.125 R: 161.725 T: 161.725 R: 157.125 International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 82a T/R:
157.125 T/R:
157.125 US: US. Government only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard use only. International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations T: 157.175 R: 161.775 T: 161.775 R: 157.175 83a T/R:
157.175
83b T/R:
157.175 T/R:
161.775 US: US Coast Guard only Canada: DFO/Canadian Coast Guard and other Government agencies. 78 79 80 81 82 83 78a 79a 80a 81a 82a 83a 110 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M US CH. INTL CH. CA CH. SHIP
(MHZ) SHORE
(MHZ) CHANNEL USAGE 84 84 84 T: 157.225 R: 161.825 T: 161.825 R: 157.225 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 85 85 85 T: 157.275 R: 161.875 T: 161.875 R: 157.275 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 86 86 86 T: 157.325 R: 161.925 T: 161.925 R: 157.325 US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) International: Public Correspondence, Port Operations 87 87 87 T: 157.375 R: 161.975 T: 161.975 R: 157.375 T/R:
157.375 T/R:
161.975 T/R:
157.375 T/R:
161.975 87b US: Automatic Identification System duplex repeater International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - east coast area. Pleasure craft - British Columbia coast area. US: Public Correspondence (Marine Operator) Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. 88 88 T: 157.425 R: 162.025 T: 162.025 R: 157.425 US: Commercial, Intership only. International: Port Operations Canada: Port operation and ship movement - British Columbia coast area. US: Commercial, Intership only. Canada: Automatic Ship Identification and Surveillance System. T/R:
157.425 T/R:
162.025 88b 87a 88a WX4 WX5 WX6 WX7 WX1 WX1 WX2 WX2 WX3 WX3 T/R:
157.425 T/R:
162.025 R: 162.55 R: 162.4 R: 162.475 R: 162.425 R: 162.45 R: 162.5 R: 162.525 8.2 NARROWBANDING The FCC has mandated that all public safety radios manufactured after January 1, 2013 comply with narrowbanding restrictions. Radios manufactured after the above date will comply with these restrictions. Existing radio personalities that contain frequencies that violate these FCC rules will cause an invalid channel error indication on the radio display. The user will need to change the radio personality to comply with the new rules. Note that there are multiple exceptions to the narrowbanding mandate, including the Marine Frequencies listed in Section 8.1. 111 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 9. GLOSSARY AES AES-256 AMBE+2 ANSI ASCII Advanced Encryption Standard Advanced Encryption Standard, 256-bit Advanced Multi-Band Excitation implementation 2 American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange
-A-
-B-
-C-
-D-
-E-
-F-
-G-
-H-
-I-
-J-
C CA CDCSS CH INFO CKR CMB CTCSS Celsius Canada Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System Channel Information Common Key References Continuous Marine Broadcast Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System DES DES-OFB DFO DMS Digital Encryption Standard Digital Encryption Standard Output Feedback Department Fisheries Ocean Degrees Minutes Seconds EPIRB Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons F FCC FM Fahrenheit Federal Communications Commission Frequency Modulation Giga (109) Hertz GHz GEOTRANS Geographic Translator GPS Global Positioning System Hertz Harris Key Loader Identification Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers International Hz HKL ID IEEE INTL 112 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Key Encryption Key kilo (103) Hertz Key Identification Key Management Facility Key Management System Key Set Key Variable Loader (Motorola KVL Device) LAT/LONG DMS LAT LONG DD LED Li-ION Latitude/Longitude Degrees Minutes Seconds Latitude/Longitude Decimal Degrees Light Emitting Diode Lithium-ION Megahertz Millimeter Mobile Radio milli (10-3) seconds Network Access Code Nickel Metal Hydride National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Office of Engineering and Technology Over-The-Air Rekey Project 25 Position Priority (Channel) Push-to-Talk Radio Frequency Radio Personality Manager 2 Radio Set Identifier Remote Speaker Microphone Receive Situational Awareness Subminiature Version A KEK kHz KID KMF KMS KS KVL MHz mm MR ms NAC Ni-MH NOAA OET OTAR P25 POS PRI PTT RF RPM2 RSI RSM RX SA SMA
-K-
-L-
-M-
-N-
-O-
-P-
-Q-
-R-
-S-
-T-
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association 113 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M TX Transmit Ultra High Frequency Unique Key Encryption Key United States United States Coast Guard Universal Time Coordinated Universal Transverse Mercator Volts, Direct Current Very High Frequency Voice Interoperability Data Access Vessel Traffic Service
-U-
-V-
-W-
-X-
-Y-
-Z-
UHF UKEK US USCG UTC UTM VDC VHF VIDA VTS WEEE Waste from Electric and Electronic Equipment 114 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 10. BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING When upgrading from XLP R1A/C to R1D/E, the radio displays
. XLP R1D installs an image that can install future software releases and is required prior to upgrading to R2. Do not power cycle when this screen is displayed on the radio or R1D must be reinstalled prior to upgrading to R2. When installing XLP R2A and later, if the upgrade is interrupted by a power cycle, the radio displays
. This indicates a partial install occurred and a reinstall is required. The radio should be connected via USB and the software should be installed again. For radios with XLP R3A and later, if to be returned for updating. is displayed, the radio has lost its factory information and needs 10.1 ERROR MESSAGES This section provides a list of error messages, as well as possible causes and solutions. Table 10-1: Displayed Error Messages, Reasons, and Resolutions SCREEN/
MENU DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGE REASON RESOLUTION INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED PAIRING FAILED Corrupt key database or incorrect database configuration. Bluetooth pairing failed. Zeroize database. Ensure device is discoverable and attempt to re-pair the device. EDIT FAILED Unable to modify P25 Channel. Power cycle and try again--contact Harris if problem persists. INVALID RX FREQUENCY Entered Rx frequency is INVALID TX FREQUENCY Entered Tx frequency is invalid. invalid. INSTALL FAILED Error during install process. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Ensure frequency follows band spacing rules. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. INSTALL FAILED Extraction of compressed file failed. Transfer file again and reattempt install. Contact Harris if problem persists. INSTALL FAILED Removal of existing SW failed. Attempt install again and contact Harris if problem persists. Mission plan activation failed. Use RPM2 to ensure plan validity. Contact Harris if failures persist. Security Menu ZEROIZE FAILED Radio could not zeroize. Radio problempower cycle and contact Harris if problem persists. Security Menu NO KEYS TO ZEROIZE Key database empty. Nothing to zeroize. INCORRECT PASSWORD Maintenance password Enter valid maintenance password. Channel Info INCORRECT PASSWORD Channel edit password Enter valid channel edit password. invalid. invalid. Top-Level Screen Bluetooth Pairing Screen Channel Edit Screen Channel Edit Screen Channel Edit Screen Install Operations Install Operations Install Operations Mission Plan In Progress Screen Utilities Menu Screen 115 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M SCREEN/
MENU Top-Level Screen DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGE USER REGISTRATION FAILED FOR Top-Level Screen USER PASSWORD FAILED FOR REASON RESOLUTION The user has either entered the wrong values or the user is not in the UAS database. Check the System ID and User ID. If they are correct, your network administrator. contact The user has entered a different password then what is in the UAS when password is required. Re-enter persists, administrator. the password. contact If your the error network RADIO ESN INVALID FOR Contact your network administrator. EXCEED ALLOWED USERS FOR There are already three radios registered with the same User ID. Turn off one of these radios or register with a different ID. PROVISIONING FAILED This failure could be due to bad password or a network issue. Re-enter persists, administrator. the password. contact If your the error network Top-Level Screen Top-Level Screen Top-Level Screen 116 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 10.2 OTAR ERRORS/INFORMATION WORKAROUNDS:
1. Zeroize. IF RADIO INDICATES:
2. Load proper KEK from the Harris Key Loader or Motorola KVL. 1. INVALID KEYSTORE ZEROIZE NEEDED - This occurs if the radios keys were loaded by the Harris Key Loader followed by an attempt to load UKEKs with the Key Loader or keys with the Motorola KVL.
- Fix by performing workaround 1, followed by 2. 2. NO UKEK Displayed during a zeroize performed from the radio or a zeroize initiated from the KMF.
- Fix by performing workaround 2. 3. Zeroize Complete KMF has zeroized the radio.
- Fix by performing workaround 2. 4. Disabled OTAR Icon (red slash) OTAR is disabled while in scan, talkaround, emergency, and
- Fix by disabling these features. Icon will be corrected (no red slash). 5. Gray OTAR Icon (no red slash) OTAR has not registered with tower (Conventional or Trunked
- Fix by verifying proper frequencies. If the radio is turned to the OTAR channel out of range of a conventional tower, and then comes in range after 3 minutes, fix by issuing an OTAR. Rekey, leaving and re-enter the OTAR channel. 6. Green OTAR Icon OTAR is registered, all is well. If update fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. 7. Blue OTAR Icon OTAR is attempting to rekey. If rekey fails, verify you are in range of the tower and the KEK is correct. monitor. system).
117 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 11. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE The Technical Assistance Center's (TAC) resources are available to help with overall system operation, maintenance, upgrades and product support. TAC is the point of contact when answers are needed to technical questions. Product specialists, with detailed knowledge of product operation, maintenance and repair provide technical support via a toll-free (in North America) telephone number. Support is also available through mail, fax and e-mail. For more information about technical assistance services, contact your sales representative, or contact the Technical Assistance Center directly:
North America:
International:
Fax:
E-mail:
1-800-528-7711 1-434-385-2400 1-434-455-6712 PSPC_tac@harris.com 12. WARRANTY Please register this product within 10 days of purchase. Registration validates the warranty coverage and enables Harris to contact you in case of any safety notifications issued for this product. Registration can be made on-line at the Customer Care center webpage:
https://www.harris.com//solution/pspc-customer-service While on the webpage, please review the applicable battery and/or product warranty literature. 118 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M APPENDIX A WI-FI PROGRAMMING Due to numerous issues with discovering and programming radios connected to Enterprise Wireless networks, it is strongly suggested that a single Access Point Wireless network be used for programming radios with RPM2. See Section A.7 for more information. These instructions assume the user has a basic familiarity with Wireless (Wi-Fi) networks, their configuration, and how to connect devices. If you are unfamiliar with the terms and/or procedures mentioned in these instructions, please contact your IT department for help before attempting to configure Wi-Fi programming. For radios to be discoverable on the Wi-Fi network, your wireless router must be configured to allow Multicast (mDNS). This varies by router manufacturer; refer to your routers documentation for specific settings needed to enable Multicast (mDNS). A.1 OVERVIEW Perform the following to program a radio over Wi-Fi. For first time setup, see Section A.8.1. 1. Configure the Access Point (Section A.2). 2. Configure the personality (Section A.3). 3. Configure the RPM2 application (Section A.4). 4. Put the radio in Wi-Fi Programming Mode (Section A.5). 5. Discovery and programming in the RPM2 application (Section A.6). 6. Support for Enterprise Wireless Networks (Section A.7). 7. Helpful Hints (Section A.8). A.2 CONFIGURE THE ACCESS POINT Setup an Access Point (wireless router) as follows. The bold values provided below are the default values in the personality. Wireless Networking Name (SSID): harrisradios Shared Key (Network Password): password Wireless Authentication/Security Mode (Encryption Type): WPA WPA and WPA2-PSK are the available Encryption Types in the RPM2 application Ensure that the Access Point has Multicast (mDNS) enabled. See the second note at the top of Appendix A for more information. The following are examples of how to allow Multicast (mDNS) message to be relayed and not filtered out on two different routers. In the Buffalo Router (AC 1750), it is in Advanced settings Wireless Multicast Control. Check the Enable checkbox beside Snooping. In the Linksys router (WRT54GS), it is located under the Security Tab. Uncheck Filter Multicast to prevent the Multicast (mDNS) messages from being filtered out. 119 CAUTION NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M A.3 CONFIGURE THE PERSONALITY For a radio to be programmed over Wi-Fi, the active personality on the radio must be configured for connecting with the values that were set in Section A.2. The following steps detail how to configure an existing radio personality. 1. In the personality, navigate to OPTIONS Network Configuration. Figure A-1: Options Network Configuration 2. Under the Wi-Fi Configuration section, set the Encryption Type, Network (SSID), and Network XL radios support up to 24 different Wi-Fi networks (SSIDs). These 24 Wi-Fi networks are considered radio administrator approved and Trusted Wi-Fi Networks (TWiN) on which the radios can operate. Password. Figure A-2: Wi-Fi Configuration 3. Under Network Service Configuration, the default values can remain the same. If the wireless network is managed by another department, please coordinate with them to get it setup correctly. The Network Discovery Configuration Service Name is a Unique name used by RPM2 and radios to communicate with each other. There is more information about this in Section A.8.2. Figure A-3: Service Name 4. After the personality is configured and saved, write it to the radio over USB and then activate it. 120 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M A.4 CONFIGURE THE RPM2 APPLICATION To ensure that RPM2 can discover radios over Wi-Fi, ensure that the Enable Wi-Fi checkbox is checked on the RPM2 Preferences screen as shown in Figure A-4. This checkbox is unchecked by default. Figure A-4: Enable Wi-Fi in RPM2 Also, as shown in Figure A-4, the Service Name must be updated to reference the value in the active personalities for the radios you need to discover. See #3 in Section A.3 and Section A.8.2 for more information. For default operation using the network as described in Section A.2, no other configuration of the radio or RPM2 is required. A.5 PUT THE RADIO IN WI-FI PROGRAMMING MODE To put the radio in Wi-Fi programming mode:
1. Turn the radio off and remove the USB cable (optional). 2. Press and hold the bottom side and PTT buttons. 3. Power on the radio while continuing to hold the buttons. 4. Release the buttons when the WIFI INSTALL ACTIVE screen appears on the radio. 5. Initially, the radio displays DISCONNECTED. When the IP address is displayed, the radio is available to be programmed. 121 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M Figure A-5: Enable Wi-Fi Programming Mode on Radio Refer to Section 5.37.2 for Wi-Fi Client selection information. A.6 DISCOVERY AND PROGRAMMING IN THE RPM2 APPLICATION 1. Start RPM2. 2. Disconnect the radio from the programming cable. 3. Select the Radio tab and click the Wi-Fi connection button
. 4. When the Wi-Fi connection button is pressed, a Discovering Wi-Fi Radios message is displayed for several seconds and the radios connected to that access point with that Service Name populate the connection list. To connect over Wi-Fi, the currently active personality MUST have the correct Wi-Fi parameters. Therefore, care must be taken that all personalities on a given radio have the correct Wi-Fi parameters for the desired network. Otherwise, activation of another personality on the radio will result in the inability to establish a Wi-Fi connection. 122 NOTE NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M 5. Select a radio or radios and perform the desired action. Only Read Personality, Write Personality, and Load Code are supported over Wi-Fi. See the table below for the supported combinations. Table A-1: Wi-Fi Feature Support SINGLE RADIO MULTIPLE RADIOS
(UP TO 16) Read Single Personality Read Multiple Personalities Write Single Personality Write Multiple Personalities Load Single Code File Load Multiple Code Files Voice Annunciation Feature Data Radio Name Install Splash Screen Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes 6. In the Status Panel, all Wi-Fi related actions will have the prefix of WIFI. To help in displaying the radios, the Connection and IP Address columns are sortable. If the Access Point is not configured to the default values from Section A.2 and the active personality in the radio is removed, the radio loses connection to the Access Point and must be connected over USB to write/activate a personality to reconnect to the Access Point. A.7 RPM2 WI-FI SUPPORT FOR ENTERPRISE NETWORKS. Enterprise Networks have certain limitations when it comes to Discovering/Programming Radios in RPM2. There is a 4500 second (75 minute) caching affect inherent to implementation with the Cisco Wi-Fi solution that utilizes the Access Point (AP)/Wireless LAN Controller (WLC) components. Radios remain seen in RPM2 even after the radio leaves Wi-Fi or is turned off. It is cached in RPM2 for 4500 seconds. This issue has only been observed with the Cisco AP and WLC solution; however, other enterprise wireless solutions may observe this caching affect. Operation with a lower tiered Wi-Fi router that does not operate with a WLC will likely not observe this behavior. Please see the Software Release Notes for Media Kit SK-019007-001 (14221-3100-8110) for more information. A.8 HELPFUL HINTS A.8.1 Initial Setup and Configuration Since radio discovery is dependent on if Multicast (mDNS) messages are being received by RPM2, it is best to keep things as simple as possible. Here are the suggested steps if this is being setup and configured for the first time. 1. Configure the Access Point with the default personality values provided in Section A.2. 2. Create a basic personality with a single system, set and channel, write it to the radio and activate it over USB. 3. Complete Sections A.4 through A.6. 123 NOTE 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M If the radio was not discovered in RPM2 but an IP address is displayed on the radio screen as seen in Figure A-5, this may mean that the Multicast (mDNS) messages are not making it through the Access Point. Consult the Access Points manual and make sure that those messages are not being filtered out. A.8.2 Grouping Radios by Service Name One benefit of using a unique Service Name is that it allows the user to create logical groupings of radios to reduce the number of radios discovered in RPM2 and help reduce the overhead of keeping track of which radios have been configured. For example, if there are 100 radios in Wi-Fi programming mode (see Section A.5) with the same Service Name, all 100 radios are displayed in the Radio tab after discovery has been completed. This makes it difficult to select and program multiple radios simultaneously. However, if the Service Name in the active personality on 16 of the radios are set to something unique like fire1 and the RPM2 application Service Name (see Section A.4) is also updated to fire1, only those radios with a Service Name of fire1 are discovered and displayed in the Radio tab. 124 14221-1800-2000, Rev. M This page intentionally left blank. 125 About Harris Corporation Harris Corporation is a leading technology innovator,
-critical challenges by providing solutions that connect, inform and protect. Harris supports government and commercial customers in more than 100 countries and has approximately $6 billion in annual revenue. The company is organized into three business segments: Communication Systems, Space and Intelligence Systems and Electronic Systems. Learn more at harris.com. FLORIDA NEW YORK VIRGINIA BRAZIL UNITED KINGDOM UAE SINGAPORE
various | Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 498.59 KiB | March 02 2023 / August 27 2023 | delayed release |
various | Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 133.48 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 |
WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6389121.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com February 24, 2023 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 Subject: FCC ID: OWDTR-0145-E and 3636B-0145 Description of Changes Harris wishes to submit this description of changes for the XL-200P radio. 1. Updated LMR transmit driver amplifier (before main power amplifiers) due to part obsolescence. 2. Changed receiver front-end step attenuator from 6dB steps to 1.0dB steps. The proposed modifications affect only the licensed transmitter portion of the EUT (TNF) as these changes do not affect any of the EUTs Part 15 transmitter (NII, DTS, DSS). The proposed modifications comply with the first three points from KDB178919)III)D). 1. The new chip component is pin-for-pin compatible. 2. The new chip has the same basic function as the old chip, from an external perspective (internal circuitry may differ). 3. No change in radio parameters has occurred. Thank you for your attention to this matter. Thomas D Camper, Jr. Regulatory Manager
various | Covered List Attestation | Attestation Statements | 173.20 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 |
WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6389124.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case L3HARRIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector. 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.l3harris.com FCC Equipment Authorization Application Certification re Covered List Equipment Date: February 9, 2023 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 To Whom It May Concern:
Re:
Form:
Applicant:
Equipment:
FCC Form 731 Application for Equipment Authorization L3Harris Technologies, Inc., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector XL-200P Multi-Band Portable Land Mobile Radio Statement for 47 CFR Section 2.911(d)(5)(i) L3Harris Technologies, Inc., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector, certifies that as of the date of the application the equipment named above for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment1 prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to Section 2.903 of the FCC rules. If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, including affiliates or subsidiaries of the named companies, the applicant must include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. Additional Explanation: N/A Statement for 47 CFR Section 2.911(d)(5)(ii) L3Harris Technologies, Inc., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector, (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of this application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Thank you, L3HARRIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector By:
Name:
Title:
Date:
Telephone:
E-Mail:
Thomas D. Camper, Jr. L3Harris PSPC Regulatory Manager February 9, 2023 434-851-3175 Thomas.Camper@l3harris.com 1 - The Commissions Covered List is published by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau and posted on the Commissions website. This Covered List, which is periodically updated, identifies particular equipment, produced by particular entities, that constitutes covered equipment. https://www.fcc.gov/supplychain/coveredlist . 012423-17 rev2
various | SAR Report (2) Test Set- Up Photos | Test Setup Photos | 467.25 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 |
various | US Agent Attestation | Attestation Statements | 152.99 KiB | March 14 2023 / March 17 2023 |
WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6389126.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case L3HARRIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector. 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.l3harris.com U.S. Agent Designation for Service of Process
(Applicant is Both Grantee and U.S. Agent) TO: American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 RE: FCC Certification Section 2.911(d)(7) Information This letter is to confirm that the Applicant will also serve as the U.S. Agent for Service of Process as required by 47 CFR 2.911(d)(7). The Applicant acknowledges that they must maintain an agent for no less than one year after terminating all marketing and importation OR the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. The Applicant further acknowledges their responsibility to inform the FCC whenever the Designated U.S. Agent information changes. Applicant Company Name:
Grantee Code:
Street Address:
City/Province/Zip:
Contact Name:
Email:
Telephone No:
L3Harris Technologies, Inc., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector OWD 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 Mr. Thomas Camper, Jr. L3Harris PSPC Regulatory Manager Thomas.Camper@l3harris.com 434-455-6600 FRN:
0004945812 With a copy to:
Company Name:
Grantee Code:
Street Address:
City/Province/Zip:
Contact Name:
Email:
Telephone No:
L3Harris Technologies, Inc., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector OWD 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 Mr. Bryan Rowlands L3Harris PSPC Legal Department Bryan.Rowlands@l3harris.com 434-455-6600 FRN:
0004945812 012623-17 Rev 2 Applicant Signatures:
L3HARRIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector By:
Name:
Title:
Date:
Thomas D. Camper, Jr. L3Harris PSPC Regulatory Manager February 9, 2023 L3HARRIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., acting through its Public Safety Professional Communications Business Sector By:
Name:
Title:
Date:
Bryan K. Rowlands Principal Senior Counsel February 9, 2023
various | Agent Authorization | Cover Letter(s) | 113.52 KiB | March 02 2023 |
HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com Authority to Act as Agent January 27, 2023 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 To Whom It May Concern:
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc./Kathy Grzovic is authorized to act on our behalf, until otherwise notified, for applications to American Certification Body, Inc. (ACB). We certify that we are not subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. Thank you, Agency Agreement Expiration Date:
December 31, 2023 By:
Thomas D Camper, Jr. Title: Regulatory Manager On behalf of: Harris Corporation Telephone: 434-455-9367
various | Confidentiality Request | Cover Letter(s) | 184.96 KiB | March 02 2023 |
Date: November 8, 2022 Request for Confidentiality HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com Subject: Confidentiality Request for:
FCC ID / IC ID: OWDTR-0145-E / 3636B-0145 Pursuant to FCC 47 CFR 0.457(d) and 0.459 and/or IC RSP-100, Section 12.4, the applicant requests that a part of the subject application(s) be held confidential. Type of Confidentiality Requested Exhibit Permanent Block Diagrams
--------------------------- External Photos Permanent *1 Internal Photos Permanent Operation Description/Theory of Operation Permanent Parts List & Placement/BOM Permanent Tune-Up Procedure Permanent Schematics
--------------------------- Test Setup Photos Permanent *1 Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Users Manual Harris Corporation has spent substantial effort in developing this product and it is one of the first of its kind in industry. Having the subject information easily available to "competition" would negate the advantage they have achieved by developing this product. Not protecting the details of the design will result in financial hardship. Permanent Confidentiality:
The applicant requests the exhibits listed above as permanently confidential be permanently withheld from public review due to materials that contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. Short-Term Confidentiality for FCC Applications:
The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view for a period of 1802 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Applicant is also aware that they are responsible to notify ACB in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public before the requested period has expired. ACB will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-1705. Short Term Confidentiality for Industry Canada Applications:
Starting May 2022, ISED will recognize short term confidentiality on certain exhibits until the intended date of marketing. The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view until: April 29, 2023. Sincerely, By: /Regulatory Manager Thomas D. Camper, Jr.
(Signature/Title3) (Print name) 1 - The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided to ACB before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 and the specific Document link for D01 found at:
https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information that must accompany these requests. 2 - Please refer to https://acbcert.com/documents/misc-docs/Memo-Short-Term-Vs-Standard-Confidentiality.pdf for complete details. 3 - Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 050222-17
various | Extended Frequency Range Attestation | Attestation Statements | 191.54 KiB | March 02 2023 |
HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com November 8, 2022 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 ATTESTATION XL-200P Portable Radio Extended Frequency Range FCC ID: OWDTR-0145-E Device is for use in Public Safety Part 90. The frequency bands are:
136-174 MHz 378-406.0 MHz 406.1-522 MHz 769-775 MHz 799-805 MHz 806-824 MHz 851-869 MHz Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Harris Corporations radio programming application prevents the use of the 798-799MHz guard band. Harris Corporation acknowledges that operation on unauthorized frequencies is a violation of FCC rules. Harris Corporation acknowledges the inclusion of Grant note code EF. Part 2.106 has been used to construct the following table of frequency range capability intended for end users. Frequency(MHz) Part 90 Part 80 Part 74 Part 22 136.0000 137.0000 137.0000 - 144.0000 144.0000 - 148.0000 148.0000 - 150.8000 150.8000 - 152.8550 152.8550 - 154.0000 154.0000 - 156.2475 156.2475 156.7625 156.7625 156.8375 156.8375 157.0375 157.0375 - 157.1875 157.1875 - 157.4500 157.4500 - 161.5750 161.5750 - 161.6250 161.6250 - 161.7750 X X X X X 161.7750 - 161.9625 X 161.9625 -161.9875 161.9875 - 162.0125 162.0125 162.0375 162.0375 - 173.2000 173.2000 - 173.4000 173.4000 - 174.0000 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway 01 Lynchbu rg, VA 245 Lynchburg, VA 24501 Federal Part 101 Part 24 X X X X X X X X Frequency(MHz) Part 90 Part 80 Part 74 Part 22 Part 24 Part 101 Federal HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 378.0000 405.99375 405.99375 406.0000 406.1000 420.0000 420.0000 450.0000 450.0000 - 454.0000 454.0000 - 455.0000 455.0000 - 456.0000 456.0000 - 460.0000 460.0000 - 462.5375 462.5375 - 462.7375 X X X X X 462.7375 - 467.5375 X 467.5375 - 467.7375 467.7375 - 470.0000 470.0000 - 512.0000 512.0000 - 520.0000 769.0000-775.0000 799.0000-805.0000 806.0000-809.0000 809.0000-824.0000 851.0000-854.0000 854.0000-869.0000 X X X X X X X X HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 Thomas D. Camper, Jr. Regulatory Manager
various | Confidentiality Letter Rev 0.2 | Cover Letter(s) | 166.43 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 |
HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com Request for Confidentiality Date: August 5, 2019 Subject: Confidentiality Request for: FCC ID: OWDTR-0145-E IC ID: 3636B-0145 Pursuant to FCC 47 CRF 0.457(d) and 0.459 and IC RSP-100, Section 9.4, the applicant requests that a part of the subject FCC application be held confidential. Harris Corporation has spent substantial effort in developing this product and it is one of the first of its kind in industry. Having the subject information easily available to
"competition" would negate the advantage they have achieved by developing this product. Not protecting the details of the design will result in financial hardship. Permanent Confidentiality:
The applicant requests the exhibits listed above as permanently confidential be permanently withheld from public review due to materials that contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com Short-Term Confidentiality:
The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view for a period of 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Applicant is also aware that they are responsible to notify ACB in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public. ACB will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-
1705. NOTE for Industry Canada Applications:
IC currently only distinguishes Permanent Confidentiality exhibits as shown above. Short Term confidentiality is not considered applicable to IC applications. Sincerely, Thomas D Camper, Jr. Regulatory Manager 1 - The The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided to ACB before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 and the specific Document link for D01 found at:
https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information that must accompany these requests. 2 - Please refer to http://acbcert.com/documents/misc-docs/Memo-Short-Term-Vs-Standard-Confidentiality.pdf for complete details. 3 - Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead.
various | EMC Co-located Test Results Rev 0.1 | Test Report | 318.84 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 |
various | PC Letter Rev 0.1 | Cover Letter(s) | 90.41 KiB | August 30 2019 / September 06 2019 |
HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com August 23, 2019 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 Subject: FCC ID: OWDTR-0145-E IC: 3636B-0145 Description of changes for XL-200P (International) Class II Permissive Change Harris wishes to submit this description of changes for the XL-200P/XL-185P (International). 1. Updated design of existing LTE configuration to utilize an updated LTE module with additional capability and new band support. New LTE Module EM7511 FCC ID N7NEM75S IC ID 2417C-EM75S Harris will offer models with and without the LTE module installed, designated as follows:
Models denoted by the suffix -NA (North America) will have the new LTE Module populated Models denoted by the suffix -L will not have the new LTE Module populated
(available for field upgrade) A list of all of the models being added can be found in ISED Application Form New Model Matrix R0.1. 2. No changes to Land Mobile Radio circuitry. Thank you for your attention to this matter. Thomas D Camper, Jr. Regulatory Manager
various | Restricted Freq Channel Attestation R0.1 | Cover Letter(s) | 80.64 KiB | September 06 2019 |
HARRIS CORPORATION 221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway Lynchburg, VA 24501 www.harris.com September 3, 2019 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 FREQUENCY & CHANNEL ATTESTATION XL-200P/XL-185P, Non-Rebanded FCC ID: OWDTR-0145-E; IC: 3636B-0145 The XL-200P/XL-185P Portable Radio, Non-Rebanded, does not operate in the 5250 -
5350 MHz and 5470 5725 MHz bands. Additionally, the XL-200P/XL-185P radio does not operate in Wi-Fi channels 12 (2467 MHz) or 13 (2472 MHz), or on the 2300, 2500, or 3600 MHz channels. Harris locks out these frequencies by use of Harris Radio Program Manager and Feature Encryption. Harris Radio Personality Manager is a software application that restricts the radio to only operate on allowable frequencies. Feature Encryption allows Harris to restrict the radio to only operate within allowable frequency bands. Thomas D Camper, Jr. Regulatory Manager
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2023-03-17 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
3 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
4 | 2023-03-02 | 851 ~ 869 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | |
5 | 2019-09-06 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
6 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
7 | 806 ~ 824 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | ||
8 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
9 | 2019-01-23 | 806 ~ 824 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | |
10 | 2016-03-03 | 851 ~ 869 | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | Original Equipment |
11 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
13 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various | Effective |
2023-03-17
|
||||
various |
2023-03-02
|
|||||
various |
2019-09-06
|
|||||
various |
2019-01-23
|
|||||
various |
2016-03-03
|
|||||
various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
HARRIS CORPORATION
|
||||
various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0004945812
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
221 Jefferson Ridge Parkway
|
||||
various |
Lynchburg, VA
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
various | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
various |
H******@acbcert.com
|
|||||
various | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
various |
B2: General Mobile Radio And Broadcast Services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 22 (non-cellular) 73, 74, 90, 95, 97, & 101 (all below 3 GHz)
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
various | Grantee Code |
OWD
|
||||
various | Equipment Product Code |
TR-0145-E
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
various | Name |
T******** C****
|
||||
various | Title |
Regulatory Manager
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
434-4********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
434-4********
|
||||
various |
t******@harris.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc
|
||||
various |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc.
|
|||||
various | Name |
R****** M********
|
||||
various |
R**** M******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
360 Herndon Parkway
|
||||
various |
Herndon, 20170
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
70368********
|
||||
various |
70368********
|
|||||
various |
51057********
|
|||||
various |
70368******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
703-6******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
703.6******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
a******@rheintech.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc
|
||||
various |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc.
|
|||||
various | Name |
K******** G********
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
360 Herndon Parkway
|
||||
various |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc.
|
|||||
various |
Herndon, 20170
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
70368********
|
||||
various |
70368********
|
|||||
various |
70223********
|
|||||
various |
702-2********
|
|||||
various |
a******@rheintech.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | No | |||||
various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | No | |||||
various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 08/27/2023 | ||||
various | 03/04/2020 | |||||
various | 08/29/2016 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
various | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
various | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
various | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
various | TNF - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Face | |||||
various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Multi-band portable radio with Bluetooth & Wi-Fi | ||||
various | XL-200P, Multi-Band Portable Land Mobile Radio, Non-Rebanded | |||||
various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
various | Original Equipment | |||||
various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
various | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change Power Output is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR of Head, Body and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.10, <0.10, and 5.73 W/kg, respectively. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF Exposure Environment. This c2pc authorizes modifications to the licensed transmitter in the EUT, and affects the maximum simultaneous transmission SAR level. | ||||
various | Class II Permissive Change Power Output is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. This transmitter has 20 MHz and 40 MHz bandwidth modes as described in the compliance. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.1, <0.1, and 5.73 W/kg. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF Exposure Environment. This c2pc authorizes modifications to the licensed transmitter in the EUT, and affects the maximum simultaneous transmission SAR level. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change Power Output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must not be used except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. This device is approved in mobile/portable configurations and only those antenna(s) tested with the device may be used with this transmitter. Device is a enabled for 5 GHz band operations and has 20MHz, 40MHz bandwidth modes as described in this filing. End users must be provided with antenna instructions and transmitter operating conditions to satisfy RF Exposure compliance. highest reports SAR for Head, Body and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.10, <0.10, and 5.73 W/kg respectively. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF Exposure Environment. This c2pc authorizes modifications to the licensed transmitter in the EUT, and affects the maximum simultaneous transmission SAR level. | |||||
various | Class II Permissive Change Manufacturer's Rated Power is 6W for VHF, 5W for UHF, 3W for 700 MHz Band and 3W for the 800 MHz band. Output power at antenna terminal is listed on the grant. SAR for body worn operation has been tested and meets the FCC RF Exposure guidelines when used with the Harris Corporation listed accessories designated for this product. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF Exposure Environment. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. This device may operate only with antennas as described in this filing and must transmit with a source-based time-averaging duty factor not exceeding 50%. SAR was evaluated for body worn and held-to-face operating modes. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body, and simultaneous transmission conditions are 2.81, 5.04, and 5.73 W/kg respectively. This C2PC authorizes component replacements due to obsolescence. | |||||
various | Power Output is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. This transmitter has 20 MHz and 40 MHz bandwidth modes as described in the compliance. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body, and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.1, <0.1, and 5.41 W/kg. This change adds updated LTE Module configurations. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Power Output is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body, and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.10, <0.10, and 5.41 W/kg respectively. This change adds updated LTE Module configurations. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Manufacturer's Rated Power is 6W for VHF, 5W for UHF, 3W for 700 MHz Band and 3W for the 800 MHz Band. Output power at antenna terminal is listed on the grant. SAR for body worn operation has been tested and meets the FCC RF Exposure guidelines when used with the Harris Corporation listed accessories designated for this product. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF Exposure Environment. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. This device may operate only with antennas as described in this filing and must transmit with a source-based time-averaging duty factor not exceeding 50%. SAR was evaluated for body worn and held-to-face operating modes. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body, and simultaneous transmission conditions are 2.78, 4.28, and 5.41 W/kg respectively. This change adds updated LTE Module configurations. | |||||
various | Power Output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must not be used except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. This device is approved in mobile/portable configurations and only those antenna(s) tested with the device may be used with this transmitter. Device is a enabled for 5 GHz band operations and has 20MHz, 40MHz bandwidth modes as described in this filing. End users must be provided with antenna instructions and transmitter operating conditions to satisfy RF exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for Head, Body, and simultaneous transmission conditions are <0.10, <0.10, and 5.41 W/kg respectively. This change adds updated LTE Module configurations. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Manufacturer's Rated Power is 6W for VHF, 5W for UHF, 3W for 700 MHz Band and 3W for the 800 MHz Band. Output power at antenna terminal is listed on the grant. SAR for body worn operation has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Harris Corporation listed accessories designated for this product. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an 0cupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. This device may operate only with antennas as described in this filing and must transmit with a source-based time-averaging duty factor not exceeding 50%. SAR was evaluated for body worn and held-to-face operating modes. The highest reported SAR values are Head 1.68W/kg, Body-worn 5.23W/kg. This change adds software capability to produce the HVD-TDMA modulation waveform, adding the following Emissions Designators - 18K5F1W for HVD-TDMA SMR and 12K9F1W for HVD-TDMA NPSPAC2. No hardware changes have been made. | |||||
various | Manufacturer's Rated Power is 6W for VHF, 5W for UHF, 3W for 700 MHz Band and 3W for the 800 MHz Band. Output power at antenna terminal is listed on the grant. SAR for body worn operation has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Harris Corporation listed accessories designated for this product. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an 0cupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. End users must be informed of the body worn requirements for satisfying RF Exposure compliance. This device may operate only with antennas as described in this filing and must transmit with a source-based time-averaging duty factor not exceeding 50%. SAR was evaluated for body worn and held-to-face operating modes. The highest reported SAR values are Head 1.65W/kg, Body-worn 5.00W/kg. | |||||
various | Power Output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this device must not be used except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. This device is approved in mobile/portable configurations and only those antenna(s) tested with the device may be used with this transmitter. Device is a enabled for 5 GHz band operations and has 20MHz, 40MHz bandwidth modes as described in this filing. End users must be provided with antenna instructions and transmitter operating conditions to satisfy RF exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for values for Head: 1.65W/kg, Body-worn 5.00W/kg. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Power Output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. This transmitter has 20 MHz and 40 MHz bandwidth modes as described in this filing. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for values for Head: 1.65W/kg, Body-worn 5.00W/kg. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Power Output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be used in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Highest reported SAR for values for Head: 1.65W/kg, Body-worn 5.00W/kg. This device must be restricted to work related operations in an Occupational/Controlled RF exposure Environment. | |||||
various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Rhein Tech Laboratories, Inc.
|
||||
various | Name |
R****** M********
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
703-6********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
703-6********
|
||||
various |
r******@rheintech.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0500000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0069 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.234 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.015 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.008 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 7 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 8 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 9 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 11 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 12 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 13 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 14 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 15 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 16 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 17 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 18 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 19 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 21 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 22 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 23 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 24 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 25 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 26 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 27 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 28 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 29 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 31 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 32 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 33 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 34 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 35 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 36 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 37 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 38 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 39 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 41 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 42 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 43 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 44 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 45 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 46 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 47 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 48 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 49 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 51 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 52 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 53 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 54 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 55 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 56 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 57 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 58 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 59 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 61 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 62 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 63 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 64 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 65 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 66 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 67 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 68 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 69 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 7 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 71 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 72 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 73 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 74 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 75 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0069 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.234 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0500000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 3 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 4 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 5 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 6 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 7 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 8 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 9 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 11 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 12 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 13 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 14 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 15 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 16 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 17 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 18 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 19 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 21 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 22 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 23 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 24 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 25 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 26 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 27 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 28 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 29 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 3 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 31 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 32 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 33 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 34 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 35 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 36 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 37 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 38 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 39 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 4 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 41 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 42 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 43 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 44 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 45 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 46 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 47 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 48 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 49 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 5 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 51 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 52 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 53 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 54 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 55 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 56 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 57 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 58 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 59 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 6 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 61 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 62 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 63 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 64 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 65 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 66 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 67 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 68 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 69 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 7 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 71 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 72 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 73 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 74 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 75 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.015 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.008 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 2 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 3 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 4 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 5 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 6 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 7 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 8 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 9 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 11 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 12 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 13 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 14 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 15 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 16 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 17 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 18 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 19 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 2 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 21 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 22 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 23 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 24 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 25 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 26 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 27 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 28 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 29 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 3 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 31 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 32 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 33 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 34 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 35 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 36 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 37 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 38 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 39 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 4 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 41 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 42 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 43 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 44 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 45 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 46 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 47 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 48 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 49 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 5 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 51 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 52 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 53 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 54 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 55 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 56 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 57 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 58 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 59 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 6 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 61 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 62 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 63 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 64 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 65 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 66 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 67 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 68 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 69 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 7 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 71 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 72 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 73 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K9F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 74 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 18K5F1W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 75 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 2 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 3 | 22,74,8 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 4 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 5 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 6 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 7 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 8 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 9 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 11 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 136 | 174 | 6 | 0.4 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 12 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 13 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 14 | 22,74,8 | EF | 378 | 470 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 15 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 16 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 17 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 470 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 16K0F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 18 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K0F3E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 19 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 2 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 11K7F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 21 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 22 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 7K10F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 23 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 24 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K40F1E | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 25 | 22,74,80,9 | EF | 378 | 522 | 5 | 0.7 ppm | 8K10DXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 26 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 27 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 28 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 29 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 3 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 31 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 32 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 33 | 9 | 769 | 775 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 34 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 35 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 36 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 37 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 38 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 39 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 4 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 41 | 9 | 799 | 805 | 3 | 0.8 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 42 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 43 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 44 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 45 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 46 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 47 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 48 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 49 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 5 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 51 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 52 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 53 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 54 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 55 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 56 | 9 | 806 | 824 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 57 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 58 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 59 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 16K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 6 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 61 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 62 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 14K0F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 63 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K0F3E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 64 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 65 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 11K7F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 66 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 15K4F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 67 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 12K1F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 68 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 69 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 7 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K40F1E | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 71 | 9 | 851 | 869 | 3 | 0.6 ppm | 8K10DXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.015 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.012 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5700 | 0.01 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.008 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0069 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.234 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0500000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC